SLS AMGGT Coupe and GT RoadsterOperator's Manual

Order no. 6515 4916 13 Part no. 197 584 25 00 Edition Edition C 2014

É1975842500=ËÍ1975842500

SLSA

MGGT

Coup

eand

GTRo

adste

rOperat

or'sM

anual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® areregistered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark ofJohnson Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade-marks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Har-man International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg-istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora-tion.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are reg-istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in succes-sion indicate an instruction with sev-eral steps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells you where you canfind more information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on thenext page.

Dis‐Dis‐playplay

This font indicates a display in themultifunction display/COMAND dis-play.

Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro-tected by copyright © 2005The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rightsreserved.

As at 11.07.2013

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving. For your own safetyand a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc-tions and warning notices in this manual.Ignoring them could result in damage to thevehicle or personal injury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RmodelRorderRcountry specificationRavailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

1975842500 É1975842500=ËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 18

At a glance ........................................... 25

Safety ................................................... 35

Opening and closing ........................... 61

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 83

Lights and windshield wipers ............ 95

Climate control ................................. 105

Driving and parking .......................... 117

On-board computer and displays .... 149

Stowage and features ...................... 199

Maintenance and care ...................... 217

Breakdown assistance ..................... 233

Wheels and tires ............................... 249

Technical data ................................... 279

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...12 V socket

see Sockets4ETS (Electronic Traction System) .... 55

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 165Function/notes ................................ 54Warning lamp ................................. 192

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 108ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 57Additional speedometer ................... 158Additives (engine oil) ........................ 284Adjusting lumbar support .................. 86Air bags

Display message ............................ 171Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 40Head bag ......................................... 42Important safety notes .................... 38Knee bag .......................................... 41PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-tor lamp ........................................... 42Safety guidelines ............................. 37Side impact air bag .......................... 41

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

Air filter (display message) .............. 180AIRSCARF

Switching on/off .............................. 88AIRSCARF vents

Setting the blower output .............. 114Air vents

Important safety notes .................. 113Setting ........................................... 113Setting the blower output of theAIRSCARF vents ............................. 114Setting the center air vents ........... 114Setting the side air vents ............... 114Switching AIRSCARF on/off ............ 88

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

AMGAdaptive sport suspension system .. 140Button for AMG menu .................... 128E-SELECT lever .............................. 121Menu (on-board computer) ............ 160SETUP ............................................ 128SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-gear sporttransmission .................................. 121

Anti-lock braking systemsee ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-Theft Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ashtray ............................................... 203ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-play

Hiding service messages ............... 222Service messages .......................... 222

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 58Function ........................................... 58Switching off the alarm .................... 58

Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 154Audio system

see separate operating instructionsAuthorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshopAuthorized workshop

see Qualified specialist workshopAUTO lights

Display message ............................ 174Automatic headlamp mode ................ 96Automatic transmission

Overview ........................................ 121

BBAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 55Battery

Display message ............................ 185Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 65Important safety notes .................... 64Replacing ......................................... 65

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 240Display message ............................ 178

4 Index

Important safety notes .................. 238Jump starting ................................. 242

Beltsee Seat belts

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 157Display message ............................ 181Notes/function .............................. 145

Brake Assistsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 169Notes ............................................. 285

Brake lamps (display message) ....... 174Brakes

ABS .................................................. 54BAS .................................................. 55Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 285Display message ............................ 165Display messages .......................... 165High-performance brake system .... 137Important safety notes .................. 135Maintenance .................................. 136Riding tips ...................................... 135Warning lamp ........................ 190, 192

Breakdownsee Flat tiresee Towing away/tow-starting

Bulbssee Replacing bulbs

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 20

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Capacitiessee Technical data

Carsee Vehicle

CareCar wash ........................................ 223Display ........................................... 229Exhaust pipe .................................. 229Exterior lights ................................ 228Gear or selector lever .................... 229

Matte finish ................................... 226Notes ............................................. 223Paint .............................................. 225Plastic trim .................................... 229Power washer ................................ 225Rear view camera .......................... 228Seat belt ........................................ 230Seat cover ..................................... 230Sensors ......................................... 228Soft top .......................................... 227Steering wheel ............................... 229Trim pieces .................................... 230Washing by hand ........................... 225Wheels ........................................... 225Windows ........................................ 227Wiper blades .................................. 227Wooden trim .................................. 230

Car wash (care) ................................. 223CD player/CD changer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 155Center console

Lower section .................................. 31Upper section .................................. 30

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 159Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 62

Changing bulbsLicense plate lighting ..................... 101

Charge maintenance socket ............ 214Children

In the vehicle ................................... 51Restraint systems ............................ 51

Child seatSpecial seat belt retractor ............... 53Top Tether ....................................... 53

Cigarette lighter ................................ 203Climate control

Automatic climate control (dual-zone) .............................................. 107Controlling automatically ............... 110Cooling with air dehumidification .. 108Defrosting the windows ................. 112Defrosting the windshield .............. 111Important safety notes .................. 106Indicator lamp ................................ 110Maximum cooling .......................... 111

Index 5

Notes on using dual-zone auto-matic climate control ..................... 108Overview of systems ...................... 106Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 110Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 113Refrigerant ..................................... 284Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 285Setting the air distribution ............. 110Setting the airflow ......................... 111Setting the air vents ...................... 113Setting the temperature ................ 110Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 113Switching on/off ........................... 108Switching theMONO function on/off .................................................. 111Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 112

CockpitOverview .......................................... 26see Instrument cluster

COMANDsee separate operating instructions

Combination switch ............................ 98Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 153Convenience closing feature .............. 77Convenience opening feature ............ 76

seeOpening/closing the sidewin-dows (all)

CoolantDisplay message ............................ 177

Coolant (engine)Checking the level ......................... 221Important safety notes .................. 285Temperature (on-board computer) .. 160

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 24Crash-responsive emergency light-ing ....................................................... 100Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 139Deactivating ................................... 140Display message ............................ 180

Driving system ............................... 138Function/notes ............................. 138Important safety notes .................. 138LIM indicator lamp ......................... 139Setting a speed .............................. 139Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 139

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 202Important safety notes .................. 202

Curb weightsee Technical data

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 23Customer Relations Department ....... 23

DDashboard

see CockpitData

see Technical dataDaytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 175Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 158Switching on/off (switch) ................ 96

Declarations of conformity ................. 22Delayed switch-off

Exterior lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 158Interior lighting .............................. 159

Diagnostics connection ...................... 22Digital speedometer ......................... 152Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 229Display messages

ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-play ................................................ 222Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 164Driving systems ............................. 180Engine ............................................ 177General notes ................................ 162Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 164Lights ............................................. 173Safety systems .............................. 170Service interval display .................. 222SmartKey ....................................... 185Tires ............................................... 182Vehicle ........................................... 184

6 Index

Distance recorder ............................. 152see Odometersee Trip odometer

Door control panelOverview .......................................... 33

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 159Automatic locking (switch) ............... 70Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 62Display message .................... 184, 186Emergency locking ........................... 71Emergency unlocking ....................... 70Important safety notes .................... 68Opening (from inside) ...................... 69

Drinking and driving ......................... 135Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 126Manual ........................................... 127SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 160

Drive program display ...................... 123Driver's door

see DoorsDriving abroad

Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 223Symmetrical low beam .................... 96

Driving lampssee Daytime running lamps

Driving on flooded roads .................. 137Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 54ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 57BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 55Electronic brake force distribution ... 57ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 56ETS (Electronic Traction System) ..... 55Important safety information ........... 54Overview .......................................... 54

Driving systemsAMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 140Blind Spot Assist ............................ 145Cruise control ................................ 138Display message ............................ 180

PARKTRONIC ................................. 141Rear view camera .......................... 144

Driving tipsAMG ceramic high-performancecompound brake system ............... 137Brakes ........................................... 135Break-in period .............................. 118Drinking and driving ....................... 135Driving abroad ................................. 96Driving in winter ............................. 137Driving on wet roads ...................... 137Exhaust check ............................... 135Fuel ................................................ 135General .......................................... 134Hydroplaning ................................. 137Icy road surfaces ........................... 137Limited braking efficiency onsalted roads ................................... 136Snow chains .................................. 253Symmetrical low beam .................... 96Wet road surface ........................... 136

DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 155DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 155

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 159Function/notes ................................ 89

EASY-EXIT featureCrash-responsive ............................. 90Function/notes ................................ 89Switching on/off ........................... 159

EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 166Function/notes ................................ 57

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Electronic traction control systemsee ETS ............................................ 55

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 70Trunk ............................................... 74Vehicle ............................................. 70

Emergency Tensioning DevicesFunction ........................................... 50Safety guidelines ............................. 37

Index 7

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 19

EngineDisplay message ............................ 177Engine number ............................... 281Starting .......................................... 120Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 120Starting with the KEYLESS-GOstart function ................................. 120Switching off .................................. 132

Engine diagnostics warning lamp .... 195Engine oil

Adding ........................................... 220Additives ........................................ 284Checking the oil level ..................... 219Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 219Display message .................... 178, 179Filling capacity ............................... 284Notes about oil grades ................... 283Notes on oil level/consumption .... 219Temperature (on-board computer) .. 160Temperature gauge ........................ 150Viscosity ........................................ 284

E-SELECT lever ................................... 121ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

Deactivating/activating ................... 56Display message ............................ 170Function/notes ................................ 56Important safety information ........... 55Warning lamp ................................. 193

Exhaust check ................................... 135Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 229Exterior lighting

Setting options ................................ 96see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ......................................... 90Dipping (automatic) ......................... 91Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 91Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 91Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 160Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 91

Setting ............................................. 91Storing settings (memory function) .. 92Storing the parking position ............. 91

FFiller cap

see Fuel filler flapFirst-aid kit ......................................... 234Flat tire

Preparing the vehicle ..................... 235Raising the vehicle ......................... 272TIREFIT kit ...................................... 235

Floormats ........................................... 214Fuel

Additives ........................................ 283Consumption statistics .................. 153Displaying the range ...................... 153Driving tips .................................... 135E10 ................................................ 282Fuel gauge ....................................... 27Grade (gasoline) ............................ 282Important safety notes .................. 282Problem (malfunction) ................... 131Refueling ........................................ 128Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 282

Fuel filler flap, opening/closing ....... 129Fuel level

Calling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 153

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 282Problem (malfunction) ................... 131

Fuse boxFront-passenger footwell ............... 247Rear compartment ......................... 247

FusesAllocation chart ............................. 247Before changing ............................. 247Important safety notes .................. 246

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 214Important safety notes .................. 211

8 Index

Opening/closing the garage door .. 213Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 212

Gasoline ............................................. 282Gear indicator .................................... 123Gear or selector lever (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 229Genuine parts ...................................... 18Glove box ........................................... 200

HHazard warning lamps ........................ 98Head bags ............................................ 42Headlamp cleaning system

Notes ............................................. 286Headlamps

Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 221Cleaning system (capacity) ............ 286Cleaning system (function) .............. 99Cleaning system (notes) ................ 286Fogging up ....................................... 99see Automatic headlamp mode

Head level heating (AIRSCARF) .......... 88Heating

see Climate controlHigh-beam headlamps

Switching on/off .............................. 98High-beam headlamps (displaymessage) ............................................ 175Hill start assist .................................. 121Hood

Closing ........................................... 219Display message ............................ 184Important safety notes .................. 218Opening ......................................... 218

Hydroplaning ..................................... 137

IIgnition lock ....................................... 119

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 58Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lampsIndicators

see Turn signals

Instrument clusterOverview .......................................... 27Settings ......................................... 157Warning and indicator lamps ........... 28

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 158Interior lighting

Automatic control ............................ 99Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 159Emergency lighting ........................ 100Manual control ............................... 100Overview .......................................... 99Reading lamp ................................... 99

JJack

Storage location ............................ 234Using ............................................. 272

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 242

KKEYLESS-GO start function

Display message ............................ 185Start/Stop button .......................... 119Starting the engine ........................ 120

Key positionsSmartKey ....................................... 119

Kickdown ........................................... 124Driving tips .................................... 124

Knee bag .............................................. 41

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 161License plate lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 101License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 175Lights

Activating/deactivating the inter-ior lighting delayed switch-off ........ 159Automatic headlamp mode .............. 96Display message ............................ 173Driving abroad ................................. 96

Index 9

Hazard warning lamps ..................... 98High beam flasher ............................ 98High-beam headlamps ..................... 98Light switch ..................................... 96Low-beam headlamps ...................... 97Parking lamps .................................. 97Standing lamps ................................ 97Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board computer) .. 158Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (switch) ...................... 96Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 158Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 158Turn signals ..................................... 98see Replacing bulbs

LIM indicator lampCruise control ................................ 139

Lockingsee Central locking

Locking (doors)Automatic ........................................ 70Emergency locking ........................... 71From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 70

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Low-beam headlampsDisplay message ............................ 174Setting for driving abroad (sym-metrical) .......................................... 96Switching on/off .............................. 97

MM+S tires ............................................ 252Malfunction message

see Display messagesManual drive program ...................... 127Matte finish (cleaning instructions) .. 226mbrace

Call priority .................................... 208Display message ............................ 173Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 208Emergency call .............................. 205

General notes ................................ 204Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 209MB info call button ........................ 207Remote vehicle locking .................. 209Roadside Assistance button .......... 207Search & Send ............................... 209Self-test ......................................... 205System .......................................... 205

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 64Locking vehicle ................................ 71Unlocking the driver's door .............. 70

Memory card (audio) ......................... 155Memory function ................................. 92Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 164Messages

see Display messagesMirrors

see Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror

Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 155

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 63MP3

Operation ....................................... 155see separate operating instructions

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 152Permanent display ......................... 158

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 151Overview .......................................... 29

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 153On-board computer ....................... 153see separate operating instructions

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle .. 118

10 Index

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Faults ............................................... 46Operation ......................................... 42System self-test ............................... 45

Occupant safetyChildren in the vehicle ..................... 51Important safety notes .................... 36

OCSFaults ............................................... 46Operation ......................................... 42System self-test ............................... 45

Odometer ........................................... 152On-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 160Audio menu ................................... 154Convenience submenu .................. 159Displaying a service message ........ 222Display messages .......................... 162Factory settings ............................. 160Important safety notes .................. 150Instrument cluster submenu .......... 157Lighting submenu .......................... 158Menu overview .............................. 152Message memory .......................... 164Navigation menu ............................ 153Operation ....................................... 151RACETIMER ................................... 161Service menu ................................. 157Settings menu ............................... 157Standard display ............................ 152Telephone menu ............................ 155Trip menu ...................................... 152Vehicle submenu ........................... 159Video DVD operation ..................... 155

Opening and closing ........................... 68Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ................ 22Important safety notes .................... 21

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Operator's ManualVehicle equipment ........................... 19

Outside temperature display ........... 150Overhead control panel ...................... 32

PPaint code number ............................ 280Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 225Panic alarm .......................................... 36Parcel net ........................................... 201Parking ............................................... 131

Important safety notes .................. 131Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ................................. 91Rear view camera .......................... 144see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidsee Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 166Electric parking brake .................... 133

Parking lampsSwitching on/off .............................. 97

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 143Driving system ............................... 141Function/notes ............................. 141Problem (malfunction) ................... 144Range of the sensors ..................... 142Warning display ............................. 142

PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicatorlamp ...................................................... 42Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .. 229Power washers .................................. 225Power windows

see Side windowsProgram selector ............................... 124Protection of the environment

General notes .................................. 18Pulling away ...................................... 120

QQualified specialist workshop ........... 23

RRACE START ....................................... 125RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 161

Index 11

RadioSelecting a station ......................... 154see separate operating instructions

Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 22Reading lamp ....................................... 99Rear spoiler

Display message ............................ 189Extending/retracting ..................... 210Problem ......................................... 211

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 228Function/notes ............................. 144

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) .......................... 90Dipping (automatic) ......................... 91

Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ................... 113Switching on/off ........................... 112

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 284Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 27Important safety notes .................. 128Refueling process .......................... 129see Fuel

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 211Programming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 212

Replacing bulbsImportant safety notes .................. 100

Reporting safety defects .................... 23Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 179Warning lamp ................................. 196see Fuel

Reversing lamps (displaymessage) .. 175Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 20Roof

see Soft topRoute

see Route guidance (navigation)

Route guidance (navigation) ............ 153

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 51Child restraint systems .................... 51Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 42

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

Seat beltsBelt force limiters ............................ 50Cleaning ......................................... 230Correct usage .................................. 48Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 50Fastening ......................................... 49Important safety guidelines ............. 47Releasing ......................................... 49Safety guidelines ............................. 37Special seat belt retractor ............... 53Warning lamp ................................. 191Warning lamp (function) ................... 49

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 86Adjusting (manually) ........................ 86Adjusting lumbar support ................ 86Cleaning the cover ......................... 230Correct driver's seat position ........... 84Important safety notes .................... 85Seat heating problem ...................... 87Storing settings (memory function) .. 92Switching AIRSCARF on/off ............ 88Switching seat heating on/off ......... 87

Selector leverPositions ........................................ 121

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 228Service interval display

Displaying service messages ......... 222Hiding service messages ............... 222Notes ............................................. 222Service messages .......................... 222

Servicemenu (on-board computer) .. 157Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 285Coolant (engine) ............................ 285Engine oil ....................................... 283Fuel ................................................ 282

12 Index

Important safety notes .................. 281Notes ............................................. 281Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 284Washer fluid ................................... 286

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 160On-board computer ....................... 157

Setting the air distribution ............... 110Setting the airflow ............................ 111SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 160Shift ranges ....................................... 127Side impact air bag ............................. 41Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 176Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 227Convenience closing feature ............ 77Convenience opening feature .......... 76Important safety information ........... 75Opening/closing .............................. 75Opening/closing (all) ....................... 76Problem (malfunction) ..................... 78

SmartKey ............................................. 68Changing the battery ....................... 65Changing the programming ............. 63Checking the battery ....................... 65Convenience closing feature ............ 77Convenience opening feature .......... 76Display message ............................ 185Door central locking/unlocking ....... 62Loss ................................................. 66Mechanical key ................................ 64Opening/closing soft top ................. 80Positions (ignition lock) ................. 119Problem (malfunction) ..................... 66Starting the engine ........................ 120Unlocking/locking vehicle ............... 68

SmartKey positionsKEYLESS-GO start function ............ 119

Snow chains ...................................... 253Socket

Glove box ....................................... 204Sockets

Center console .............................. 204Points to observe before use ......... 203

Soft topCleaning ......................................... 227Display message ............................ 184Important safety notes .................... 78Opening/closing (SmartKey) ........... 80Opening/closing (with soft-topswitch) ............................................. 79Problem (malfunction) ..................... 82Relocking ......................................... 80wind screen ..................................... 80

Soft-top switch .................................... 79Specialist workshop ............................ 23Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Activating/deactivating the addi-tional speedometer ........................ 158Digital ............................................ 152In the Instrument cluster ................. 27Selecting the unit ofmeasurement .. 157see Instrument cluster

SPORT handling modeWarning lamp ................................. 193

SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem)

Display message ............................ 173Introduction ..................................... 37Warning lamp ................................. 194Warning lamp (function) ................... 37

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 176Switching on/off .............................. 97

Starting (engine) ................................ 120Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 89Button overview ............................... 29Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 151Cleaning ......................................... 229Important safety notes .................... 88Paddle shifters ............................... 125Storing settings (memory function) .. 92

Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 161Stowage areas ................................... 200Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 201Center console .............................. 201Center console (rear) ..................... 201

Index 13

Cup holders ................................... 202Glove box ....................................... 200Important safety information ......... 200Parcel net ...................................... 201Rear wall ........................................ 201

Summer openingsee Convenience opening feature

Summer tires ..................................... 252Sun visor ............................................ 202Surround lighting (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 158Suspension tuning

AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 140

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 113Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 58

TTachometer ........................................ 150Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 175Tail lamps (Display message) ........... 175Tank content

Fuel gauge ....................................... 27Technical data

Notes ............................................. 280Tires/wheels ................................. 275

TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 208Display message ............................ 173Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 208Emergency call .............................. 205General notes ................................ 204Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 209MB info call button ........................ 207Remote vehicle locking .................. 209Roadside Assistance button .......... 207Search & Send ............................... 209Self-test ......................................... 205System .......................................... 205

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 156Menu (on-board computer) ............ 155Number from the phone book ........ 156

Redialing ........................................ 156Rejecting/ending a call ................. 156

TemperatureCoolant (on-board computer) ......... 160Engine oil ....................................... 150Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 160Outside temperature ...................... 150

Theft deterrent systemsATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 58Immobilizer ...................................... 58Tow-away alarm ............................... 59

Timesee separate operating instructions

Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 161TIREFIT kit .......................................... 235Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 256Checking manually ........................ 256Display message ............................ 182Maximum ....................................... 256Notes ............................................. 255Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 237Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 237Recommended ............................... 253

Tire pressure monitoring systemChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 258Function/notes ............................. 256Restarting ...................................... 259Warning lamp ................................. 197Warning message .......................... 259

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 269Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 268Bar (definition) ............................... 268Characteristics .............................. 268Checking ........................................ 251Curb weight (definition) ................. 269Definition of terms ......................... 268Direction of rotation ...................... 270Display message ............................ 182Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 270DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 267

14 Index

DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 268GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 268GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 268GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 269Important safety notes .................. 250Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 268Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 269Labeling (overview) ........................ 264Load bearing index (definition) ...... 270Load index ..................................... 266Load index (definition) ................... 269Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 269Maximum load on a tire (definition) .. 269Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 269Maximum tire load ......................... 267Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 269Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 269PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 269Replacing ....................................... 270Service life ..................................... 252Sidewall (definition) ....................... 269Speed rating (definition) ................ 268Storing ........................................... 271Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 268Technical data ............................... 277Temperature .................................. 264TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 270Tire bead (definition) ...................... 269Tire pressure (definition) ................ 269Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 268Tire size (data) ............................... 275Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 264Tire tread ....................................... 251Tire tread (definition) ..................... 269Total load limit (definition) ............. 270Traction ......................................... 263

Traction (definition) ....................... 270Tread wear ..................................... 263Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 263Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 268Wear indicator (definition) ............. 270Wheel rim (definition) .................... 268see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 53Tow-away alarm .................................. 59Towing

Important safety guidelines ........... 244Installing the towing eye ................ 245Removing the towing eye ............... 245With the rear axle raised ................ 245

Towing awayWith both axles on the ground ....... 246

TransmissionDriving tips .................................... 124Selector lever ................................ 121Shift range ..................................... 127

Transmission position display ......... 123Transmission positions .................... 123Transporting the vehicle .................. 246Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .. 230Trip computer (on-board computer) .. 153Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 152Trunk

Emergency release .......................... 74Important safety guidelines ............. 72Locking separately ........................... 74Opening (automatically frominside) .............................................. 73

Trunk lidDisplay message ............................ 184Opening/closing ........................ 72, 73Opening dimensions ...................... 286

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 286see Technical data

Turn signal (display message) ......... 174Turn signals

Switching on/off .............................. 98Type identification plate

see Vehicle identification plate

Index 15

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 70From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 70

Upshift indicator ............................... 128

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 202Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 23Display message ............................ 184Equipment ....................................... 19Individual settings .......................... 157Limited Warranty ............................. 24Loading .......................................... 260Locking (in an emergency) ............... 71Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 62Lowering ........................................ 275Maintenance .................................... 20Parking for a long period ................ 134Pulling away ................................... 120Raising ........................................... 272Reporting problems ......................... 23Towing away .................................. 244Transporting .................................. 246Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 70Unlocking (SmartKey) ................ 62, 68Vehicle data ................................... 286

Vehicle data ....................................... 286see Technical data

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 286see Technical data

Vehicle emergency locking ................ 71Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 280Vehicle tool kit .................................. 234Vehicle weights

see Technical dataVideo (DVD) ........................................ 155VIN ...................................................... 280

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 192Brakes ................................... 190, 192Check Engine ................................. 195Cruise control ................................ 139ESP® .............................................. 193Fuel tank ........................................ 196Overview .......................................... 28PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-tor lamp ........................................... 42Reserve fuel ................................... 196Seat belt ........................................ 191SPORT handling mode ................... 193SRS ................................................ 194Tire pressure monitor .................... 197

Warranty ...................................... 19, 280Washer fluid

see Windshield washer systemWasher fluid (display message) ....... 185Weight

see Technical dataWheel bolt tightening torque ........... 275Wheel chock ...................................... 271Wheels

Checking ........................................ 251Cleaning ......................................... 225Important safety notes .................. 250Interchanging/changing ................ 270Mounting a new wheel ................... 274Mounting a wheel .......................... 271Removing a wheel .......................... 273Storing ........................................... 271Tightening torque ........................... 275Wheel size/tire size ....................... 275

Windowssee Side windows

Wind screen ......................................... 80Windshield washer system .............. 221

Filling capacity ............................... 286Notes ............................................. 286

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 103Replacing the wiper blades ............ 102Switching on/off ........................... 101

16 Index

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 252Slippery road surfaces ................... 137Snow chains .................................. 253

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 252

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 227Important safety notes .................. 102Replacing ....................................... 102

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 230Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

Index 17

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try to regen-erate or re-use them. Observe the relevantenvironmental rules and regulations whendisposing of materials. In this way you willhelp to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraint sys-tems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

18 Introduction

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheelsas well as accessories relevant to safetywhich have not been approved by Mercedes.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Useonly genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts ofequal quality. Only use tires, wheels andaccessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts shouldtherefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-tain a supply of genuineMercedes-Benz partsfor necessary service and repair work. In addi-tion, strategically located parts delivery cen-ters provide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification num-ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 280).Always specify the vehicle identification num-ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts. You can find information aboutthis in the printed Operator's Manual.

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences are possi-ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may notfeature all functions described here. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The Operator's Manual and MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

WarrantyThe implied warranty for your vehicle appliesin accordance with the warranty terms andconditions in the Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordancewith the followingwarranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, RhodeIsland and Vermont Emission Control Sys-tem WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Replacement parts and accessories are cov-ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-sories warranties. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and War-ranty Information booklet, have an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for areplacement. The new Service and War-ranty Information booklet will be posted toyou.

Introduction 19

Z

Information for customers in Califor-niaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after a rea-sonable number of repair attemptsMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author-ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one ormore substantial defects or malfunctions inthe vehicle that are covered by its expresswarranty. During the period of 18 monthsfrom original delivery of the vehicle or theaccumulation of 18,000miles (approximately29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle,whichever occurs first, a reasonable numberof repair attempts is presumed for a retailbuyer or lessee if one or more of the followingoccurs:(1) the same substantial defect or malfunc-

tion results in a condition that is likely tocause death or serious bodily injury if thevehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc-tion has been subject to repair two ormore times, and you have directly noti-fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writingof the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc-tion of a less serious nature than cate-gory (1) has been subject to repair four ormore times and you have directly notifiedus in writing of the need for its repair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and Warranty Book-let with you when you bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Theservice advisor will record every service foryou in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgramoffers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis-tance" section in the Service and Warrantybooklet (Canada). You will find both in yourvehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim-ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con-tacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in

20 Introduction

the Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconvertermay not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalytic con-verter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairs

carried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function asintended and/or jeopardize the operatingsafety of the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of an accident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Introduction 21

Z

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-tronics, the general operating permit is ren-dered invalid.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriageor parts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under-carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tirescould be damaged without the damagebeing visible. Components damaged in thisway can unexpectedly fail or, in the case ofan accident, no longer withstand the strainthey are designed to.If the underbody paneling is damaged,combustible materials such as leaves,grass or twigs can gather between theunderbody and the underbody paneling. Ifthese materials come in contact with hotparts of the exhaust system, they can catchfire.In such situations, have the vehiclechecked and repaired immediately at aqualified specialist workshop. If on con-tinuing your journey you notice that drivingsafety is impaired, pull over and stop thevehicle immediately, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. In such cases,visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper-ation is subject to the following two condi-tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm-ful interference, and 2) These devices mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired oper-ation. Changes ormodifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevices must accept any interference, includ-ing interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device."

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-tics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equip-ment on the diagnostics connection isused, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can lead to emissions monitoringinformation being reset, for example. Thismay lead to the vehicle failing to meet the

22 Introduction

requirements of the next emissions test dur-ing the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has the nec-essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-fications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book-let.Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when driv-ing your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe Technical Data section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problem

again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con-tact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Introduction 23

Z

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and itselectronic components is available on the fol-lowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

24 Introduction

Cockpit ................................................. 26Instrument cluster .............................. 27Multifunction steering wheel ............. 29Center console .................................... 30Overhead control panel ...................... 32Door control panel .............................. 33

25

Ataglance

Cockpit

Function Page

: Cruise control lever 139

; Steering wheel paddleshifters 125

= Instrument cluster 27

? Overhead control panel 32

A PARKTRONIC display 142

B Adjusts the steering wheelelectrically 89

Function Page

C Combination switch 98

D Unlocks the trunk 73

E Diagnostics connection 22

F Opens the hood 218

G Electric parking brake 133

H Light switch 96

26 CockpitAt

aglance

Instrument cluster

Overview

Function Page

: Speedometer

; Upshift indicator 128

= Tachometer 150

? Engine oil temperature dis-play 150

Function Page

A Multifunction display 152

B Fuel gage

Instrument cluster 27

Ataglance

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page

: ESP® 193

; Seat belts 191

= Brakes (USA only)J Brakes (Canada only)

? High-beam headlamps 98

A Low-beam headlamps 97

B Turn signal 98

C SRS 194

D Check Engine

E ABS 192

Function Page

F Engine oil temperature 150

G Tire pressure 197

H Electric parking brake (USAonly)! Electric parking brake(Canada only)

I Reserve fuel 196

J SPORT handling mode 56

K ESP® OFF 55

28 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 152

; COMAND with display; seethe separate operatinginstructions

= 6~ Makes/acceptsor rejects/ends a call 156WX Increases/reduces the volume8 Mute

? ?Switches on the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operating instruc-tions

Function Page

A % Back or deactivatesthe Voice Control System

B =; Selects a menu 1519: Selects a sub-menu or scrolls throughlistsa Confirms selectionsand hides display mes-sages

Multifunction steering wheel 29

Ataglance

Center console

Upper section

Function Page

: Controls COMAND, see theseparate operating instruc-tions

; Adjusts AIRSCARF, left(Roadster only) 88

= Retracts/extends rearspoiler (vehicles with AMGadaptive sport suspensionsystem) 210

? Hazard warning lamps 98

Function Page

A PARKTRONIC 143

B Adjusts AIRSCARF, right(Roadster only) 88

C Seat heating, right 87

D 4 PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp 42

E Operates dual-zone auto-matic climate control 107

F Seat heating, left 87

30 Center consoleAt

aglance

Lower section

Function Page

: AMG E-SELECT selectorlever 121

; COMAND controller

= Stowage compartment 20112 V socket 203Ashtray 203Cigarette lighter 203

? Stowage compartmentwithcup holder 201

A Soft top switch (Roadsteronly) 79

B Ignition lock (behind stow-age space) 119

C Calls up/stores AMG menu(SETUP) 128

Function Page

D Adjusts AMG adaptivesport suspension system 140Retracts/extends rearspoiler (vehicles withoutAMG adaptive sport sus-pension system) 210

E Activates/deactivatesESP® 56Activates/deactivatesSPORT handling mode 56

F Start/Stop button 119

G Selects the drive program 126

H Parking lock button P 121

Center console 31

Ataglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 99

; c Switches the interiorlighting on/off 100

= | Switches the auto-matic interior lightingcontrol on/off 99

? p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 99

A ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 207

B G SOS button (mbracesystem) 205

Function Page

C Rear-view mirror 90

D Transmitter buttons for thegarage door opener 212

E Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system)telephone and the VoiceControl System

F F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbrace sys-tem) 207

32 Overhead control panelAt

aglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: Opens the door 69

; &% Locks/unlocksthe vehicle 69

= Z Selects the left exte-rior mirror 90

? ª Folds the exteriormir-rors in/out electrically 91

Function Page

A \ Selects the right exte-rior mirror 90

B 7 Adjusts the exteriormirrors 90

C W Opens/closes theside windows 75

Door control panel 33

Ataglance

34

Useful information .............................. 36Panic alarm .......................................... 36Occupant safety .................................. 36Child restraint systems ...................... 51Driving safety systems ....................... 54Theft deterrent locking system ......... 58

35

Safety

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 23).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: forapproximately one second.An alarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes.

X To deactivate: press! button:again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX Press the Start/Stop button.The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Occupant safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to or work improperly con-ducted on restraint system components ortheir wiring, as well as tampering with inter-connected electronic systems, can lead to therestraint systems no longer functioning asintended.Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices(ETDs), for example, could deploy inadver-tently or fail to deploy in accidents althoughthe deceleration threshold for air bag deploy-ment is exceeded. Therefore, never modifythe restraint systems. Do not tamper withelectronic components or their software.

In this section, you will learn the most impor-tant facts about the restraint system compo-nents of the vehicle.The restraint system consists of:RSeat beltsRChild restraint systemsAdditional protection is provided by:RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)RAir bag system components with:

- PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp- Front-passenger seat with OccupantClassification System (OCS)

Although the systems are independent, theirprotective functions work in conjunction witheach other. Not all air bags are alwaysdeployed in an accident.

i For information on infants and childrentraveling with you in the vehicle restraintsystems for infants and children, see "Chil-dren in the vehicle" (Y page 51).

36 Occupant safetySafety

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

IntroductionSRS reduces the risk of occupants cominginto contact with the vehicle's interior in theevent of an accident. It can also reduce theeffect of the forces to which occupants aresubjected during an accident.SRS consists of:R6 SRS warning lampRair bagsRair bag control unit (with crash sensors)REmergency Tensioning DevicesRseat belt force limiters

SRS warning lamp

G WARNINGIf SRS is malfunctioning, restraint systemcomponents may be triggered unintentionallyor might not be triggered at all in the event ofan accident with a high rate of vehicle decel-eration. There is an increased risk of injury,possibly even fatal.Have SRS checked and repaired immediatelyat a qualified specialist workshop.

SRS functions are checked regularly whenyou switch on the ignition and when theengine is running. Therefore, malfunctionscan be detected in good time.The6 SRSwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out no later than a few secondsafter the engine is started.The SRS components are in operational read-iness when the6 SRS indicator lamp goesout while the engine is running.

There is a malfunction if:Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not lightup when the ignition is switched onRthe engine is running and the 6 SRSwarning lamp does not go out after a fewsecondsRthe engine is running and the 6 SRSwarning lamp lights up again

Safety guidelines for seat belts, Emer-gency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) andair bags

G WARNINGRDamaged seat belts or seat belts that havebeen subjected to stress in an accidentmust be replaced. Their anchoring pointsmust also be checked. Only use seat beltsinstalled or supplied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-sioning Devices (ETDs) contain perchloratematerial, which may require special han-dling and regard for the environment.Check your national disposal guidelines.California residents, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.RAir bags and ETDs are designed to functionon a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETDthat has deployed must be replaced.RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.They could tear.RDo not make any modification that couldchange the effectiveness of the seat belts.RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.RNo modifications of any kind may be madeto any components or wiring of the SRS.RDonot change or remove any component orpart of the SRS.RDo not install additional trim material, seatcovers, badges, etc. over the steeringwheel hub, front-passenger front air bag

Occupant safety 37

Safety

Z

cover, outer sides of the seat backrests,door trim panels, or door frame trims.RDo not install additional electrical/elec-tronic equipment on or near SRS compo-nents and wiring.RKeep area between air bags and occupantsfree of objects (e.g. packages, purses,umbrellas, etc.).RAir bag systemcomponentswill be hot afteran air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.RNever place your feet on the instrumentpanel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RImproper repair work on the SRS creates arisk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment.Work on the SRS must therefore only beperformed by qualified technicians. Con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.RFor your protection and the protection ofothers, when scrapping the air bag unit orETD, our safety instructions must be fol-lowed. These instructions are availablefrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RGiven the considerable deployment speed,required inflation volume, and the materialof the air bags, there is the possibility ofabrasions or other, potentiallymore seriousinjuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benzstrongly recommends that you inform thesubsequent owner that the vehicle is equip-ped with SRS. Also, refer them to the appli-cable section in the Operator's Manual.

Air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAir bags are designed to reduce the potentialof injury and fatality rates in certain situa-tions:Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front-passenger front air bags and knee bags)Rside impacts (head bags and side impact airbags)

However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.When the air bags are deployed, a smallamount of powder temporarily comes out ofthe air bags. This powder generally does notconstitute a health hazard and does not indi-cate that there is a fire in the vehicle. In orderto prevent potential breathing difficulties, youshould leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe todo so. If you have any breathing difficulty butcannot get out of the vehicle, then get fresh airby opening a side window or door.

G WARNINGIn order to reduce the potential danger ofinjuries caused during the deployment of thefront air bags, the driver and front passengermust always be correctly seated and weartheir seat belts.For maximum protection in the event of a col-lision, you must always be in the normal seatposition with your back against the backrest.Fasten your seat belt and make sure that it iscorrectly positioned on your body.

38 Occupant safetySafety

As the air bag inflates with considerablespeed and force, a proper seating positionand correct positioning of the hands on thesteering wheel will help to keep you at a safedistance from the air bag. Occupants who arenot wearing their seat belt, are not seatedproperly or are too close to the air bag can beseriously injured or killed by an air bag as itinflates with great force instantaneously:Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly andin a position that is as upright as possiblewith your back against the backrest.Rmove the driver's seat as far back as pos-sible, still permitting proper operation ofvehicle controls. The distance from thecenter of the driver's chest to the center ofthe air bag cover on the steering wheelmust be at least 10 inches(25 cm) or more.You should be able to accomplish this byadjusting the seat and steering wheel. Ifyou have any difficulties, please contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Rdo not lean your head or chest close to thesteering wheel or dashboard.Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.Placing hands and arms inside the rim canincrease the risk and potential severity ofhand/arm injury when the driver front airbag inflates.Radjust the front-passenger seat as far backas possible from the dashboard when theseat is occupied.ROccupants, especially children, shouldnever place their bodies or lean their headsin the area of the door or the seat where thehead bag or side impact air bag inflates.This could result in serious injuries or deathshould the head bag or side impact air bagbe deployed. Always sit as upright as pos-sible, wear the seat belt properly and use anappropriately sized infant restraint, toddlerrestraint, or booster seat recommended forthe size and weight of the child.

Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injuries to you or other occupants.

If you sell your vehicle, it is important that youmake the buyer aware of this safety informa-tion. Be sure to give the buyer this Operator'sManual.

G WARNINGThere is a possibility of a head bag- or sideimpact air bag-related injury if occupants,especially children, are not properly seated orrestrained when next to a head bag or sideimpact air bag that needs to deploy rapidly ina side impact in order to do its job.To help avoid the possibility of injury, pleasefollow these guidelines:

(1) Occupants, especially children,should never place their bodies orlean their heads in the area of thedoor or the seat where the headbag or side impact air bag inflates.This could result in serious injuriesor death should the head bag orside impact air bag be deployed.

(2) Always sit as upright as possible,and use the seat belts properly.Make sure that children 12 yearsold and under use an appropriatelyinfant restraint, toddler restraintor booster seat recommended forthe size and weight of the child.

(3) Always wear seat belts properly.

If you believe that, even with the use of theseguidelines, it would be safer for yourpassenger seat occupants to have thepassenger side head bag or side impact airbag deactivated, then deactivation can be car-ried out upon your written request at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an addi-tional cost.Please contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call the Customer AssistanceCenter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (inCanada) at 1-800-387-0100 for details.

The air bags are only deployed if the air bagcontrol unit detects the need for deployment.

Occupant safety 39

Safety

Z

Only in the event of such a situation, will theair bags provide their supplemental protec-tion.The driver and passenger should always weartheir seat belts. Otherwise it is not possiblefor the air bags to provide their supplementalprotection.In case of other types of impacts and impactsbelow air bag deployment thresholds, airbagswill not deploy. The driver and passengerwill then be protected to the extent possibleby a properly fastened seat belt. A properlyfastened seat belt is also needed to providethe best possible protection in a rollover.Air bags provide additional protection; theyare not, however, a substitute for seat belts.All vehicle occupants must fasten their seatbelts regardless of whether your vehicle isequipped with air bags or not.It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the airbags continue to provide supplemental crashprotection for occupants.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger front airbag; deploys in front of and above the glovebox.The front air bags increase protection for thedriver's and front-passenger's head andchest.

They are deployed:Rin the event of certain frontal impactsRif the system determines that air bagdeployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRdepending onwhether the seat belt is beingusedRindependently of other air bags in the vehi-cle

If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags aregenerally not deployed. If the system detectshigh vehicle deceleration in a longitudinaldirection, the front air bags are deployed.Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. In the event of a collision, the air bagcontrol unit evaluates the vehicle decelera-tion. When the first deployment threshold isreached, the front air bag is filled with enoughpropellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.The front air bag is fully deployed if a seconddeployment threshold is exceeded within afew milliseconds.The deployment of the front-passenger frontair bag is also influenced by the weight cate-gory of the front passenger, which is deter-mined by the Occupant Classification System(OCS) (Y page 42).The front air bags are not deployed in situa-tions where a low impact severity is pre-dicted. You will then be protected by the fas-tened seat belt.The front-passenger front air bag will only bedeployed if:Rthe Occupant Classification System (OCS)has detected that the front-passenger seatis occupiedRthe 45 indicator lamp on the centerconsole is not litRthe air bag control unit predicts a high-impact severity

40 Occupant safetySafety

Driver's/front-passenger knee bag

Driver's knee bag: deploys underneath thesteering column and front-passenger kneebag; underneath the glove box. Theydeploy together with the front air bags. Theyare designed to operate together with thefront air bags in frontal impacts if certainthresholds are exceeded. The knee bagsoperate at best in conjunction with correctlypositioned and fastened seat belts.The driver and front-passenger knee bagsenhance the level of protection against:Rknee injuriesRthigh injuriesRlower leg injuries

Sidebags

G WARNINGThe pressure sensors for side impact air bagcontrol are located in the doors. Do not mod-ify any components of the doors or door trimpanels including, for example, the addition ofdoor speakers.Improper repair work on the doors or themodification or addition of components to thedoors create a risk of rendering the sideimpact air bags inoperative or causing unin-tended air bag deployment. Work on thedoors must therefore only be performed byqualified technicians. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNINGOnly use seat covers which have been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehicle model. Using other seat covers mayinterfere with or prevent the deployment ofthe side impact air bags. Contact an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.

When deployed, the side impact air bags offeradditional protection for the thorax of thevehicle occupants on the side of the vehicleon which the impact occurs. However, theydo not protect the:RheadRneckRarms

Example: Coupe

Side impact air bags: deploy next to theouter seat cushions.The side impact air bags are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accidentwith a high rate oflateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration,e.g. in a side impactRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsIf the vehicle rolls over, the side impact airbags are generally not deployed. They aredeployed if the system detects high vehicledeceleration or acceleration in a lateral direc-tion and determines that side impact air bagdeployment can offer additional protection tothat provided by the seat belt.

Occupant safety 41

Safety

Z

Side impact air bags will not deploy in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.If the OCS detects that the front-passengerseat is not occupied and the front-passengerseat belt is not fastened (the belt tongue isnot engaged in the seat belt buckle), the sideimpact air bag on the front-passenger sidewill not deploy. The side impact air bag on thefront-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless ofwhether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Head bagsThe head bags enhance the level of protectionfor the head (but not chest or arms) of thevehicle occupants on the side of the vehicleon which the impact occurs.

Example: Coupe

Headbags: deploy in the side window area.They are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rate oflateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration,e.g. in a side impactRif the system determines that the vehicleoccupants are offered additional protec-tion to that provided by the seat beltRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the ETDs

Ron the driver's side and passenger side, inthe event of a vehicle rollover and if thesystemdetermines that air bag deploymentcan offer the vehicle occupants additionalprotection to that provided by the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsHead bags: will not deploy in side impactswhich do not exceed the system's presetdeployment thresholds for lateral accelera-tion/deceleration. You will then be protectedby the fastened seat belt.If the OCS has classified the front-passengerseat as unoccupied and the front-passengerseat belt is not fastened, the head bag on thepassenger side will not deploy. The head bagon the front-passenger side will deploy if thefront-passenger seat belt is fastened, regard-less of whether the front-passenger seat isoccupied or not.

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

How the Occupant Classification Sys-tem worksThe Occupant Classification System (OCS)categorizes the occupant on the front-passenger seat using a weight sensor. Thefront-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag are deactivated auto-matically for certain weight categories. The45 indicator lamp shows you the cur-rent status. If the 45 indicator lamplights up, the front-passenger front air bagand the front-passenger knee bag are disa-bled.The system does not deactivate:Rthe front-passenger side impact air bagRthe front-passenger head bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

42 Occupant safetySafety

To be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin a position that is as upright as possiblewith their back against the seat backrestRwith their feet on the floorIf the front-passenger's weight is transferredto another object in the vehicle (e.g. by lean-ing on armrests), OCS may not be able toapproximate the occupant's weight category.In order to determine whether or not the frontpassenger has been detected, both the driverand the front passenger should observe the45 indicator lamp.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion are damaged, have the nec-essary repair work carried out at an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat accessoriesthat have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGIf the45 indicator lamp lights upwhenthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a larger person, ask the passenger toreposition themselves on the seat so that the45 indicator lamp goes out.In the event of a collision, the air bag controlunit will not allow front-passenger front airbag and front-passenger knee bag deploy-ment when the OCS has classified the front-passenger occupant as weighing as much asor less than a typical 12-month-old child in astandard child restraint or if the front-passenger seat is classified as being unoccu-pied.If OCS has detected that the front passengerweighs the same as or less than a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraintsystem, the 45 indicator lamp lightsup when the engine is started and remains lit.This indicates that the front-passenger frontair bag is deactivated.If OCS determines that the front-passengerseat is unoccupied, the 45 indicator

lamp lights up once the engine has beenstarted and remains lit. This shows that thefront-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deactivated.If OCS determines that the front passengerweighsmore than a typical 12month old childin a standard child restraint system and clas-sifies this as a small person (e.g. a teenager orsmall adult), the 45 indicator lamplights up for approximately 6 seconds whenthe engine is started. Depending on occupantweight sensor readings from the seat, it willthen remain illuminated or go out. If the45 indicator lamp is illuminated, thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated.With the 45 indicator lamp out, thefront-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deactivated.If OCS has determined that the frontpassenger is an adult ormediumsized person,the 45 indicator lamp lights up forapproximately 6 seconds when the engine isstarted and then goes out. This shows that thefront-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are activated.If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,the front-passenger front air bag and thefront-passenger knee bag are deactivated andare not deployed.If the 45 indicator lamp does not lightup, the front-passenger air bag is enabled andwill be deployed:Rin the event of certain frontal impactsRif the impact exceeds a preset deploymentthresholdRindependently of the other air bagsIf the front-passenger air bag is deployed, therate of inflation is influenced by:Rthe rate of vehicle deceleration as assessedby the air bag control unitRthe front passenger's weight category asdetermined by the OCS

For further information, see "Air bag displaymessages" (Y page 171).

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

G WARNINGChildren 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriateinfant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt fully inaccordance with the child seat manufactur-er's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the following impor-tant information:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag tech-nology designed to deactivate the front-passenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front-passenger seat.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,evenwith the air bag technology installed inyour vehicle.RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint onthe front-passenger seat, make sure the45 indicator lamp is illuminated,indicating that the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated. Should the 45indicator lampnot illuminate or go outwhilethe restraint is installed, please checkinstallation. Periodically check the45 indicator lamp while driving tomake sure the 45 indicator lamp isilluminated. If the45 indicator lampgoes out or remains out, do not transport a

child on the front-passenger seat until thesystem has been repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you place a child in a forward-facing childrestraint on the front-passenger seat:- move the seat as far back as possible- use the proper child restraint recom-mended for the age, size and weight ofthe child

- secure child restraint with the vehicle'sseat belt according to the child seatman-ufacturer's instructions

RFor children larger than a typical 12-month-old child, the front-passenger front air bagmay or may not be activated.

If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bagwill also deploy.The OCS may have detected that the seat:Ris empty or occupied by a person with aweight of up to or less than that of a typical12-month-old child seated in a standardchild restraint.Ris occupied by a small individual, such as ayoung teenager or a small adult.Ris occupied by a child in a child restraintsystemwhoseweight is greater than that ofa typical 12-month-old child.

These are examples of when the OCS deacti-vates the front-passenger front air bag andfront-passenger knee bag. Deactivation takesplace although the collision fulfills the criteriafor deploying the driver's air bag.

44 Occupant safetySafety

If the SmartKey has been removed from theignition lock or the Start/Stop button hasbeen set to position 0, the45 indicator lamp: does not lightup.

G WARNINGIf the red 6 SRS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and the 45 indica-tor lamp light up simultaneously, the OCS ismalfunctioning. The front passenger front airbag will be deactivated in this case. Have thesystem checked by qualified technicians assoon as possible. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Only have the seat repaired or replaced at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.In order to ensure proper operation of the airbag system and OCS:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in aposition that is as upright as possible withyour back against the seat backrest.RWhen seated, a passenger should not posi-tion him/herself in such a way as to causethe passenger's weight to be lifted from theseat cushion as this may result in the OCSbeing unable to correctly approximate thepassenger's weight category.RRead and observe all warnings in this chap-ter.

System self-testThe 45 indicator lamp illuminateswhen you:Rturn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lockRpress the Start/Stop button once or twiceIf an adult occupant is properly sitting on thepassenger seat and the OCS classifies theoccupant as an adult, the45 indicatorlamp illuminates and goes out again afterapproximately 6 seconds.If the seat is not occupied and the OCS clas-sifies the front passenger seat as being unoc-cupied, the 45 indicator lamp will illu-minate and not go out.

G WARNINGIf the 4 5 indicator lamp does not illu-minate, the system is not functioning. Youmust contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter before seating any child on thepassenger seat.

For more information, see "Problems with theOccupant Classification System"(Y page 46).

G WARNINGNever place anything between seat cushionand child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reducesthe effectiveness of the OCS. The undersideand rear side child restraint system must beplaced entirely on the seat cushion and thebackrest of the front-passenger seat back-rest.If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passengerseat backrest.An incorrectlymounted child seat could causeinjuries to the child in case of an accident,instead of increasing protection for the child.Follow the manufacturer's instructions forinstallation of child restraint systems.

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

Problems with the Occupant Classification System

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The 45 indica-tor lamp illuminatesand remains illumi-nated.The person on thefront-passenger seat:Rhas the weight of atypical adultRhas been determinedby the system not tobe a child.

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 171).

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typicaladult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do notallow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The 45 indica-tor lamp does not illu-minate and/or doesnot remain illuminated.The front-passengerseat is:RunoccupiedRoccupied with aweight up to or lessthan a typical 12-month-old child in astandard childrestraint system

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and thechild seat.

X Check the installation of the child restraint system.X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight ontothe seat.

X If the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate, have theOCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on the front-passengerseat as long as the OCS is not functioning.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 171).

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger seat,do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

46 Occupant safetySafety

Exiting in an emergency (Coupe only)If the vehicle is lying on its roof after an acci-dent, the hinge fasteners of the gullwingdoors are released pyrotechnically. You willhear a bang if this is the case. After the fas-teners have been released, the doors areforced outwards. Simultaneously, the doorlocks are unlocked. The 6 SRS warninglamp lights up.

i The hinge fasteners are only releasedwhen the control unit recognizes that cer-tain conditions have been fulfilled, e.g.when the vehicle is in a stabilized positionon its roof.

The doors can then be moved from theinside/outside by pulling the door handle.

Seat belts

Important safety notesThe use of infant or child restraints is requiredby law in all 50 states, the District of Colum-bia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian prov-inces.Even where this is not the case, all vehicleoccupants should have their seat belts fas-tened when the vehicle is in motion.

i See "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 51) for further information oninfants and children traveling in the vehicleas well as on child restraint systems.

G WARNINGAlways fasten your seat belt before driving off.Always make sure your passenger is properlyrestrained. You and your passenger shouldalways wear seat belts.Failure to wear and properly fasten and posi-tion your seat belt considerably increasesyour risk of injuries and their likely severity inan accident.If you are ever in an accident, your injuriescould be considerablymore severe if you havenot fastened your seat belt correctly. If you do

not fasten your seat belt, you are much morelikely to collide with parts of the vehicle inter-ior or be ejected from it. This may result inserious or fatal injury.In the same crash, the possibility of serious orfatal injury is considerably reduced if youwearyour seat belt properly. The air bags can onlyoffer the intended protection if the occupantsare wearing their seat belts properly.

G WARNINGNever ride in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined position asthis can be dangerous. You could slide underthe seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it,the seat belt would apply force at the abdo-men or neck. That could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat beltprovide the best restraint when the wearer isin a position that is as upright as possible andthe seat belt is properly positioned on thebody.

G WARNINGNever let more people ride in the vehicle thanthere are seat belts available. Make sureeveryone riding in the vehicle is correctlyrestrained with a separate seat belt. Neveruse a seat belt for more than one person at atime.

G WARNINGDamaged seat belts or seat belts that havebeen subjected to stress in an accident mustbe replaced and their anchoring points mustalso be checked.Only use seat belts which have been approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Do not make any modifications to the seatbelts. This can lead to unintended activationof the ETDs or to their failure to activate whennecessary.Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

Have all work carried out only by qualifiedtechnicians. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Correct use of the seat belts

G WARNINGUSE SEAT BELTS PROPERLYRSeat belts can only work when used prop-erly. Never wear seat belts in any other waythan as described in this section, as thatcould result in serious injuries in the eventof an accident.REach occupant should wear their seat beltat all times, because seat belts help reducethe likelihood of and potential severity ofinjuries in accidents, including rollovers.The integrated restraint system includesSRS (driver front air bag, knee bags, front-passenger front air bag, side impact airbags, head air bags), Emergency Tension-ing Devices (ETDs) and seat belt force lim-iters. The system is designed to enhancethe protection offered to properly beltedoccupants in certain frontal (front air bags,knee bags and ETDs) and side (side impactair bags, head air bags and ETDs) impactswhich exceed preset deployment thresh-olds.RNever wear the shoulder belt under yourarm, across your neck or off your shoulder.In a frontal crash, your body would movetoo far forward. That would increase thechance of head and neck injuries. The seatbelt would also apply too much force to theribs or abdomen, which could severelyinjure internal organs such as your liver orspleen.Adjust the seat belt so that the shouldersection is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder (it should nottouch the neck).RPosition the lap belt as low as possible onyour hips and not across the abdomen. Ifthe lap belt is positioned across your abdo-

men, it could cause serious injuries in acrash.RNever wear seat belts over rigid or breaka-ble objects in or on your clothing, such aseyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these mightcause injuries.RMake sure the seat belt is always fittedsnugly. Take special care of this whenwear-ing loose clothing.RNever use a seat belt for more than oneperson at a time. Do not fasten a seat beltaround a person and another person orother objects at the same time.RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In acrash, you would not have the full width ofthe seat belt to distribute impact forces.The twisted seat belt against your bodycould cause injuries.RPregnant women should also always use alap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portionshould be positioned as low as possible onthe hips to avoid any possible pressure onthe abdomen.RPlace the seat backrest in a position that isas upright as possible.RCheck your seat belt during travel to makesure it is properly positioned.RNever place your feet on the instrumentpanel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RWhen using a seat belt to secure infantrestraints, toddler restraints, or children inbooster seats, always follow the child seatmanufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. Theycould tear.Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in thedoor or in the seat adjustment mechanism.This could damage the seat belt.Never attempt to make modifications to seatbelts. This could impair the effectiveness ofthe seat belts.

48 Occupant safetySafety

Fastening seat belts

G WARNINGChildren 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropri-ately sized infant restraint, child restraint sys-tem, or booster seat recommended for thesize and weight of the child. For additionalinformation, see the "Children in the vehicle"section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is sig-nificantly increased if the child restraints arenot properly secured in the vehicle and/or thechild is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Example: CoupeX Adjust the seat and move the backrest toan almost vertical position(Y page 85).

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt sashguide:.

X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder sec-tion of the seat belt across the middle ofyour shoulder and the lap section acrossyour hips.

X Engage belt tongue; in buckle=.X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

The seat belt on the front-passenger side isequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecure child restraint systems properly on thefront-passenger seat. For further informationon special seat belt retractors, see(Y page 53).Formore information about releasing the seatbelt with release button?, see "Releasingseat belts" (Y page 49).

Releasing seat beltsX Press release button?(Y page 49) andguide belt tongue;(Y page 49) backtowards belt sash guide:(Y page 49).

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-aged seat belts can no longer fulfill theirprotective function and must be replaced.Consult an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerRegardless of whether the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already been fas-tened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lightsup for six seconds each time the engine isstarted. It then goes out once the driver andthe front passenger have fastened their seatbelts.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened whenthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. The warning tone switchesoff after approximately six seconds or oncethe driver's seat belt is fastened.

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

If after six seconds the driver or frontpassenger have not fastened their seat beltsand the doors are closed:Rthe 7 seat belt warning lamp remains litas long as either the driver's or front-pas-senger's seat belt is not fastenedRand if the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once, the7 seat belt warninglamp lights up. Additionally, a warning tonesounds with increasing intensity for a max-imumof 60 seconds or until the driver's andfront passenger's seat belts are fastened.

If the driver or front-passenger seat belt isunfastened while the vehicle is in motion, the7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and awarning tone sounds again.The warning tone ceases even if the driver orfront-passenger seat belt has still not beenfastened after 60 seconds. The7 seat beltwarning lamp stops flashing but remains lit.After the vehicle comes to a standstill, thewarning tone is reactivated and the7 seatbelt warning lamp flashes again if the vehiclespeed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goesout if:Rboth the driver and the front passengerhave fastened their seat belts.

orRthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seatbelt" (Y page 191).

Emergency Tensioning Devices, seatbelt force limitersThe seat belts are equipped with ETDs andseat belt force limiters.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,do not insert the belt tongue into the buckleof the front-passenger seat. This may oth-erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer-gency Tensioning Device in the event of an

accident, which will then need to bereplaced.

The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,pulling them close against the body.The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat posi-tions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants backtowards the backrest.Seat belt force limiters, when activated, areemployed to help reduce the peak forceexerted by the seat belts on occupants duringa crash.The seat belt force limiters are synchronizedwith the front air bags, which take on a part ofthe deceleration force. Thus, the forceexerted on the occupant is distributed over agreater area.When the ignition is switched on, the ETDscannot be triggered unless:Rthe restraint systems are operational; see"SRS warning lamp" (Y page 37)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle oneach of the three-point seat beltsRthe front-passenger seat is occupied andthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe front-passenger side

The ETDs are triggered depending on the typeand severity of an accident:Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end colli-sion, if the vehicle decelerates or acceler-ates rapidly in a longitudinal direction dur-ing the initial stages of the impactRin the event of a side impact, if the vehicleis subjected to high lateral acceleration/decelerationRCoupe: in certain situations if the vehiclerolls over, and the system determines thatit can provide additional protectionRRoadster: if the vehicle rolls overIf the Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)are triggered, youwill hear a bang, and a smallamount of smoke may also be released. Onlyin rare caseswill the bang affect your hearing.The smoke that is released generally does not

50 Occupant safetySafety

constitute a health hazard. The 6 SRSwarning lamp lights up.

G WARNINGPyrotechnic ETDs that were activatedmust bereplaced.For your safety, when disposing of the pyro-technic ETDs always follow our safety instruc-tions. These are available at any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Child restraint systems

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriateinfant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt fully inaccordance with the child seat manufactur-er's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the following impor-tant information:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag tech-nology designed to deactivate the front-passenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front-passenger seat.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passenger

front air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,evenwith the air bag technology installed inyour vehicle.RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint onthe front-passenger seat, make sure the45 indicator lamp is illuminated,indicating that the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated. Should the 45indicator lampnot illuminate or go outwhilethe restraint is installed, please checkinstallation. Periodically check the45 indicator lamp while driving tomake sure the 45 indicator lamp isilluminated. If the45 indicator lampgoes out or remains out, do not transport achild on the front-passenger seat until thesystem has been repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you place a child in a forward-facing childrestraint on the front-passenger seat:- move the seat as far back as possible- use the proper child restraint recom-mended for the age, size and weight ofthe child

- secure child restraint with the vehicle'sseat belt according to the child seatman-ufacturer's instructions

RFor children larger than a typical 12-month-old child, the front-passenger front air bagmay or may not be activated.

G WARNINGInfants and small children should never sharea seat belt with another occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the occupant and seat belt.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is sig-nificantly increased if the child restraints arenot properly secured in the vehicle and/or thechild is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Child restraint systems 51

Safety

Z

Children that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position the shoulder belt across the chestand shoulder, not the face or neck. A boosterseat may be necessary to achieve proper seatbelt positioning for children over 41 lbs(18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a boosterseat.When the child restraint is not in use, removeit from the vehicle or secure it with the seatbelt to prevent the child restraint frombecom-ing a projectile in the event of an accident.

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in the vehi-cle, even if they are secured in a child restraintsystem, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle.A child's unsupervised access to a vehiclecould result in an accident and/or seriouspersonal injury. The children could:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured throughexcessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accidentwithvehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment unless they arefirmly secured in place.

Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the eventof:Rstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:X Secure the child with a child or infant seatrestraint system appropriate to the age andweight of the child.

X Make sure that the infant or child is prop-erly secured at all times while the vehicle isin motion.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you alwaysproperly secure all infants and children with achild or infant seat restraint system for thetrip.The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesInfants and childrenmust always be seated inan appropriate infant or child restraint systemrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. The infant or child restraint systemmust be properly secured with a three-pointseat belt in accordance with the manufactur-er's instructions.All infant or child restraint systemsmustmeetthe following standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-ards 213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint systemcorresponds to the standards can be foundon an instruction label on the child restraintsystem. This confirmation can also be foundin the installation instructions that areincluded with the child restraint system.

52 Child restraint systemsSafety

Always read and follow the manufacturer'sinstructions when using an infant or childrestraint system or booster seat.Observe the warning labels in the vehicleinterior or on the infant or child restraint.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf you release the seat belt when driving, thespecial seat belt retractor is deactivated.The released seat belt cannot be engagedagain while driving, because the inertia reelpulls in the seat belt a small distance. Thechild restraint system is no longer properlysecured. There is an increased risk of seriousinjury or even fatal injury.Always keep the seat belt of the activatedspecial seat belt retractor engaged when driv-ing.

The seat belt on the front-passenger side isequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When enabled, the special seat belt retractorensures that the seat belt does not slackenonce the child seat is secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seatbelt retractor.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the beltbuckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seatbelt retractor retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is activated.

X Push down on the child restraint system totake up any slack.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivat-ing the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

X Press the seat belt release button andguide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor is deacti-vated.

Installing child restraint systemsObserve the "Important safety notes" section(Y page 51).The Top Tether anchorage is installed behindthe front-passenger seat.

X Slide the front-passenger seat forward.X Remove cover: from the Top Tetheranchorage in the direction of the arrow.

X Position Top Tether belt?. Comply withthe manufacturer's installation instruc-tions when doing so.

X Hook Top Tether hook= into Top Tetheranchorage;.

Child restraint systems 53

Safety

Z

Ensure that:RTop Tether hook= is hooked into TopTether anchorage; as shown.RTop Tether belt? is not twisted.When Top Tether hook= is connected, thechild restraint system can be secured.X Install the child restraint system.X Tension Top Tether belt?. Comply withthe manufacturer's installation instruc-tions when doing so.

The child restraint system with Top Tetherbelt? has been removed:X Slide cover: onto Top Tether anchor-age;.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)RBAS (Brake Assist System)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)RADAPTIVE BRAKE

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style orbecome distracted, the driving safety sys-tems can neither reduce the risk of accidentnor override the laws of physics. Drivingsafety systems are merely aids designed toassist driving. You are responsible for the dis-tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speedand for braking in good time. Always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing roadand weather conditions and maintain a safedistance from the vehicle in front. Drive care-fully.The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when there isadequate contact between the tires and the

road surface. Please pay special attention tothe notes on tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths, etc. (Y page 250).

i In wintry driving conditions, always usewinter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,snow chains. Only in this way will the driv-ing safety systems described in this sectionwork as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 54).

ABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering the vehi-cle when braking.

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 192) anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 165).ABS works from a speed of about5 mph(8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slipperysurfaces, even if you only brake gently.The ! warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out when the engine is running.

54 Driving safety systemsSafety

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-tion of hazardous road conditions, and func-tions as a reminder to take extra care whiledriving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 54).

BAS operates in emergency braking situa-tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,BAS automatically boosts the braking force,thus shortening the stopping distance.

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 54).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tires andthe road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize the

vehicle. The engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver whenpulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

ETS (Electronic Traction System)

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 54).

Traction control is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Switch the ignition off when:Rthe electric parking brake is being testedusing a brake dynamometer.Rthe vehicle is being towed with the rearaxle raised.

Application of the brakes by ESP®may oth-erwise destroy the brake system.

When SPORT handling mode is activated, theMwarning lamp lights up in the instrumentpanel.When ESP® is deactivated, the å andhwarning lamps light up in the instrumentpanel.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 193) and display messages which

Driving safety systems 55

Safety

Z

may be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 170).

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

Characteristics of ESP®

ESP® is activated automatically when theengine is started.If ESP® intervenes, theh ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 54).

You can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RSPORT handling mode is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGWhen SPORT handling mode is activated,there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-dents.Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-uations described in the following.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.

Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

In the following situations, it may be better toactivate SPORT handling mode or deactivateESP®:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelRwhen driving on designated roads when thevehicle's own oversteering and understeer-ing characteristics are desired

Driving in SPORT handling mode or withoutESP® requires an extremely qualified andexperienced driver.

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheelstarts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To activate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM handling mode warning lamp inthe instrument cluster lights up. The

56 Driving safety systemsSafety

SPORT handling modeSPORT handling mode message appearsin the multifunction display.

X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM handling mode warning lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. ESP® isactivated.

X To deactivate ESP®: press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up. The ÷OFFOFFmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

X To activate ESP®: when SPORT handlingmode is activated or ESP® is deactivated,press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The ÷ONONmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

Characteristics of activated SPORT han-dling modeSPORT handling mode raises the interventionthreshold for stabilizing the vehicle. Thisallows for a sportier driving style on desig-nated race circuits and may in certain situa-tions improve the traction in comparison withESP®.If SPORT handling mode is activated and oneor more wheels start to spin, theh warn-ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes.ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to a limiteddegree.When SPORT handling mode is activated:RESP® only improves driving stability to alimited degree.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.Rengine torque is only restricted to a limiteddegree, and the drive wheels are able tospin. The spinning wheels produce a cut-ting effect for better traction.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, theh warning lamp in theinstrument cluster does not flash. In such sit-uations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin. The spinningof the wheels results in a cutting action forbetter traction.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 54).

EBD monitors and controls the brake pres-sure on the rear wheels to improve drivingstability while braking.

G WARNINGIf EBD hasmalfunctioned, the rear wheels canstill lock, e.g. under full braking. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 192) as well as dis-play messages (Y page 166).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 54).

ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. In addi-tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKE

Driving safety systems 57

Safety

Z

also features the hill start assist function(Y page 121).

Theft deterrent locking system

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Any-one can start the vehicle if a valid SmartKeyhas been left inside the vehicle.X To activate: while the engine is running,turn the Start/Stop button to key position0 (Y page 119).The engine stops.

orX Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X To deactivate: turn the Start/Stop buttonto key position 2(Y page 119) withoutdepressing the brake pedal.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot bestarted when the starter battery is fullycharged, the immobilizer may be faulty.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the Smart-Key.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm sys-tem is armed after approximately15 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe trunk lidRthe hoodRRoadster: the glove boxRRoadster: a compartment in the centerconsoleRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyThe alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that triggered it, forexample.X To stop the alarm: press the Start/Stopbutton in the center console. The SmartKeymust be inside the vehicle.

orX Press the% or& button on theSmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

i If the alarm stays on for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency callsystem (USA only) or Tele Aid system (Can-ada only) initiates a call to the CustomerAssistance Center automatically. Thembrace emergency call system initiates thecall if:Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aidservice.Rthe Tele Aid service has been activatedproperly.Rthe requiredmobile phone, power supplyand GPS are available.

58 Theft deterrent locking systemSafety

Tow-away alarm

FunctionAn audible and visual alarm is triggered if yourvehicle's angle of inclination is altered whilethe tow-away alarm is armed. This can occurif the vehicle is jacked up on one side, forexample.

ArmingX Make sure that:Rthe doors are closed.Rthe trunk lid is closed.Only then is the tow-away alarm armed.

X Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey.The tow-away alarm is armed after approx-imately 30 seconds.

DeactivatingX Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.The tow-away alarm is deactivated auto-matically.

Disarming

X Select key position 0 with the Start/Stopbutton.

orX Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up briefly.

X Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey.The tow-away alarm is disarmed.

The tow-away alarm remains deactivateduntil the vehicle is unlocked and locked again.To prevent a false alarm, disarm the tow-awayalarm manually if your vehicle:Ris being transportedRis being loaded onto a ferry or car trans-porter, for exampleRis parked on a movable surface, e.g. in asplit-level garage

Theft deterrent locking system 59

Safety

Z

60

Useful information .............................. 62SmartKey ............................................. 62Doors .................................................... 68Trunk .................................................... 72Side windows ...................................... 75Soft top (Roadster) ............................. 78

61

Openingandclosing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 23).

SmartKey

Key function

General notes

i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.The Product label with FCC ID and IC cer-tification number can be found in the bat-tery case of the SmartKey.

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.The Product label with FCC ID and IC cer-tification number can be found in the bat-tery case of the SmartKey.

Locking/unlocking centrallyThe SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flapRRoadster only: the glove boxRRoadster only: the stowage compartmentunder the armrest

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

62 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, and do not give them accessto an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. They could:Rinjure themselves on vehicle partsRbe seriously or fatally injured by extremeheat or coldRinjure themselves or have an accident withvehicle equipment that may still be in oper-ation even after the SmartKey has beenremoved from the ignition, such as the seatadjustment, steering wheel adjustment ormemory function.

If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strongmagnetic fields. Otherwise, the remotecontrol function could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in thevicinity of powerful electrical installations.

: & To lock the vehicle; F To unlock the trunk lid= % To unlock the vehicleThe turn signals flash once when unlockingand three times when locking.When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 158).X To unlock centrally: press the% but-ton.

If you do not open the vehicle within approx-imately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe anti-theft alarm system is armed again.X To lock centrally: press the& button.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the setting of the lockingsystem in such a way that only the driver'sdoor and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Thisis useful if you frequently travel on your own.X To change the setting: press and holddown the% and& buttons simulta-neously for approximately six seconds untilthe battery check lamp (Y page 65)flashes twice .

SmartKey 63

Openingandclosing

Z

The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the% but-ton twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the% and& buttons simulta-neously for approximately six seconds untilthe battery check lamp flashes twice.

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey, use themechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 58).There are several ways to turn off the alarm:X Press the% or& button on theSmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key; from the SmartKey.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. Nationalguidelines must be observed during disposal.In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

64 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The SmartKey battery is working properly ifbattery check lamp: lights up briefly.

If battery check lamp: does not light upbriefly during the test, the SmartKey battery isdischarged.X Change the battery (Y page 65).

i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryX Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 64).

You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.

X Press mechanical key; into the openingin the SmartKey in the direction of thearrow until battery tray cover: opens. Donot hold the cover closed while doing so.

X Remove the cover of the battery tray.X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free clothto do so.

X Insert the front tabs of the battery tray'scover first, and then press to close it.

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

SmartKey 65

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

You cannot lock orunlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle fromclose range. Try to unlock or lock the vehicle again.

If this does not work:X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 64).X Check the SmartKey battery and replace it if necessary(Y page 65).

The SmartKey is faulty.X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key(Y page 64).

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey canceled at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

The engine cannot bestarted using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey is inthe vehicle.

A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected aseasily.X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

66 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.X Start the engine within 30 seconds of inserting the SmartKeyinto the ignition lock.

X Repeat if necessary.If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 238).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 242).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The SmartKey cannotbe turned in the ignitionlock.

The SmartKey has been in position 0 for a considerable time.X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 238).

X Start the engine.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to turn the SmartKey again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 238).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 242).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

SmartKey 67

Openingandclosing

Z

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, and do not give them accessto an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. They could:Rinjure themselves on vehicle partsRbe seriously or fatally injured by extremeheat or coldRinjure themselves or have an accident withvehicle equipment that may still be in oper-ation even after the SmartKey has beenremoved from the ignition, such as the seatadjustment, steering wheel adjustment ormemory function.

If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; if

they get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

Unlocking and opening the doorsfrom the outside

Coupe

! The doors swing upwards and out whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the vehicle.

X To open the door: point the SmartKeytowards door handle:.

X Press the% button on the SmartKey.Door handle: moves out.

X Lift the door by door handle: and swing itup as far as it will go.

68 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

X To close the door: pull the door down-wards by the outer edge or the interior doorhandle. Swing the door down gently andallow it to engage in the lower position.

X Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey if nec-essary (Y page 62).

RoadsterX To open the door: point the SmartKeytowards door handle.

X Press the% button on the SmartKey.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X Pull the door handle.

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe inside

CoupeYou can only open a door from the inside if itis unlocked.The vehicle locks the doors automatically ifyou drive faster than 9 mph (15 km/h).The doors are automatically unlocked after ajourney if you switch off the engine.

! The doors swing upwards and out whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the vehicle.

X To unlock the door manually: pressthe% button of central locking=.

orX Pull locking knob: upwards.

X To open the door: pull handle;.X Swing the door upwards as far as it will go.X To close the door: pull the door down byhandle?.

X Allow the door to engage in the lower posi-tion.

X To lock the door manually: pressthe& button of central locking=.

orX Push locking knob: downwards.

RoadsterYou can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.Only open the door when the traffic situationpermits.

X Pull door handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: popsup. The door is unlocked and can beopened.

i When a door is opened, the side windowon that side opens slightly. When the dooris closed, the side window closes again.

! The side windows will not open/close ifthe battery is discharged or if the side win-dows have iced up. It will then not be pos-sible to close the door. Do not attempt toforce the door closed. You could otherwisedamage the door or the side window.

Doors 69

Openingandclosing

Z

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. This feature may be useful if,for example, you wish to unlock the front-passenger door from the inside or lock thevehicle before you pull away.Coupe: the central locking/unlocking buttondoes not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.Roadster: the central locking/unlocking but-ton does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flapor the stowage compartments, such as theglove box.

X To lock: press button;.If both doors are closed, the vehicle locks.

X To unlock: press button:.You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. Only open the doorwhen the traffic situation permits.If the vehicle has been locked with the centrallocking button:Rand the SmartKey is set to its factory set-ting, the entire vehicle is unlocked if a dooris opened from the inside.Rand the SmartKey is set to an individualsetting, only the door that is opened frominside the vehicle is unlocked.

Automatic locking feature

CoupeYou can only open a door from the inside if itis unlocked.The vehicle locks the doors automatically ifyou drive faster than 9 mph (15 km/h).The doors are automatically unlocked after ajourney if you switch off the engine.

RoadsterThe vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the vehicle'swheels are moving at a speed in excess of9 mph (15 km/h). There is therefore a risk ofbeing locked out when the vehicle is beingpushed, towed or tested on a dynamometer.

X To deactivate: press and hold button:for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons and donot hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.

You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-board com-puter (Y page 159).

Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-ical key)If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.

70 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 58).X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 64).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

Coupe

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key intothe lock of the driver's door as far as it willgo.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise to posi-tion2.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X To open the door: press button:.The handle moves out slightly from thedoor.

X Pull the handle out as far as it will go.X Swing the door upwards by the handle.

Roadster

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseto position1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key.

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey, use the mechanical key.

Coupe

: Button for extending the handleX To lock: lock the front-passenger doormanually from the inside (Y page 69).

X Leave the vehicle and close the driver'sdoor.

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

Doors 71

Openingandclosing

Z

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseto position3.The door is locked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Check that both doors are locked.

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

RoadsterX Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door and thetrunk lid.

X Press the locking button (Y page 70).X Check that the locking knob is in the lowerposition on the front-passenger door. Pressthe locking knob down by hand, if neces-sary.

X Close the driver's door.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 64).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key clockwise as far asit will go to position1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lidare locked.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key.

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Trunk

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, and do not give them accessto an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. They could:Rinjure themselves on vehicle partsRbe seriously or fatally injured by extremeheat or coldRinjure themselves or have an accident withvehicle equipment that may still be in oper-ation even after the SmartKey has beenremoved from the ignition, such as the seatadjustment, steering wheel adjustment ormemory function.

If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become very

72 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

hot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or trunk unless theyare firmly secured in place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the event ofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

! The temperature in the trunkmay be high.For this reason, do not store any tempera-ture-sensitive objects in the trunk.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

Coupe: to fully open the trunk lid, a minimumheight of 5.5 ft (1.68 m) from the ground isnecessary.Roadster: to fully open the trunk lid, a mini-mumheight of 5.7 ft (1.75m) from the groundis necessary.The trunk lid can be:Ropened automatically from outsideRopened automatically from insideRlocked separatelyRunlocked with the mechanical keyRopened with the emergency release button

Opening/closing the trunk

Opening/closing from outside

OpeningX Press theF button on the SmartKey.The trunk lid opens slightly.

X Reach into the gap and pull up the trunk lid.

Closing

X Push the trunk lid down until it engages.Use handle: to pull down the trunk lid ifnecessary.

X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the&button on the SmartKey.

Opening the trunk from inside the vehi-cleYou can open the tailgate from the driver'sseat when the vehicle is stationary.

Trunk 73

Openingandclosing

Z

X Press trunk lid remote control button:.The trunk lid opens slightly.

Locking the trunk separatelyYou can lock the trunk separately. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the trunkremains locked and cannot be opened.X Close the trunk lid.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 64).

X Insert themechanical key fully into trunk lidlock: in the rear compartment of thecenter console.

X Turn themechanical key clockwise as far aspossible.

X Remove the mechanical key.X Check that the trunk remains locked whenyou press on the trunk lid remote controlbutton.

Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)If the trunk can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey:X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 64).

X Insert themechanical key fully into trunk lidlock: in the center console in the vehicleinterior.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseas far as possible.The trunk lid opens slightly.

Trunk emergency releaseYou can open the trunk lid from inside thevehicle with the emergency release button.

X Press emergency release button: briefly.The trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly.

X Push the trunk lid upwards to open it com-pletely.

The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunklid emergency release when the vehicle isstationary or while driving.Trunk lid emergency release light:Remergency release button: flashes for30 minutes after opening the trunk lid.Remergency release button: flashes for60 minutes after closing the trunk lid.

74 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

The trunk lid emergency release does notunlock the trunk lid if the battery is discon-nected or discharged.If the vehicle was locked centrally, openingthe trunk lid with the trunk lid emergencyrelease triggers the anti-theft alarm system.

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The side windows are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If an object blocks orrestricts a side window during the closingprocess, the side window opens again auto-matically.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 4mmof the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the side window again man-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Observe the important safety notes in the"Children in the vehicle" section (Y page 51).

Opening and closing the side win-dows

: Left side window; Right side windowThe switches for both side windows arelocated on the driver's door. There is also aswitch for the front-passenger side windowon the front-passenger door.The switches on the driver's door take prec-edence.

Side windows 75

Openingandclosing

Z

X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 119).

X To open: press corresponding switch:or;.

X To close: pull corresponding switch:or;.i If you press the switch beyond the point ofresistance, an automatic opening/closingprocess is started in the correspondingdirection. You can stop automatic opera-tion by operating the switch again.

i You can continue to operate the side win-dows after you switch off the engine. Thisfunction is available for up to five minutesor until the driver's or front-passenger dooris opened.

Opening and closing all side windows(Roadster)

Using the SmartKey

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

If the soft top is closed, you can use theSmartKey to simultaneously open or close allof the side windows:X Make sure that the soft top is closed(Y page 79).

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X To open all sidewindows: press the%button on the SmartKey until the side win-dows are fully opened.

X To interrupt the opening procedure:release the% button.

X To close all side windows: press the& button on the SmartKey until the sidewindows are fully closed.

X To interrupt the closing procedure:release the& button.

Convenience opening (Coupe)

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

You can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do so, open the sidewindowsusingthe SmartKey.

i The SmartKey must be close to the driv-er's door handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Unlock the vehicle by pressing the%button.

X Press and hold the% button until theside windows are in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the% button.

76 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

Convenience closing (Coupe)

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

When you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-neously close both side windows from out-side.

i The SmartKey must be close to the driv-er's door handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Lock the vehicle with the& button.X Press and hold the& button until theside windows are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows areclosed.

Side windows 77

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

A side window will notclose.

Objects prevent it from closing.X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window will notclose.

You cannot see the cause.If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Soft top (Roadster)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not lock the closed soft top, it mayopen during a journey. This could cause you tolose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Only drive with the soft top fully open orlocked closed.

G WARNINGIf you do not fully open/close the soft top, thesoft-top hydraulics depressurize after a shorttime. This causes the soft top to lower unex-

pectedly and may cause you or others to betrapped. There is a risk of injury.Always open or close the soft top completely.

You can open or close the soft top:Rif the vehicle is stationary orRif the speed does not exceed 30 mph(50 km/h)

If there is a strong head wind, it may not bepossible to close the soft top fully. In order toclose the soft top fully, reduce speed or stop.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only open or close the soft topwhen the vehicle is stationary.

78 Soft top (Roadster)Op

eningandclosing

! Never sit on the soft top when it is closedor store heavy objects on it. You will other-wise damage the soft top of the vehicle.

! When opening and closing the soft top,make sure that:Rthere is sufficient clearance above it, asthe soft top swings upwards.Rthere are no objects on the soft top or thesoft-top covers to the side.Rthe fabric is not dirty, wet or frozenRthe outside temperature is above -10 †.You could otherwise damage the soft top aswell as other parts of the vehicle.

i Make sure that the soft top is dry andclean before closing it. Otherwise, water ordirt could enter the vehicle interior or trunk.

Opening and closing with the soft topswitch

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the soft top, there isa risk that parts of the body could becometrapped by moving parts such as the roofmechanism, the trunk lid, or the side win-dows. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing the roof, make surethat no parts of the body are in the vicinity ofmoving parts. Release the switch if somebodybecomes trapped.

G WARNINGIf the vehicle speed exceeds 30 mph(50 km/h), the soft top stops during the open-ing or closing procedure. This impairs yourview to the rear. There is a risk of an accident.Reduce your speed to below 30 mph(50 km/h) or stop the vehicle in accordancewith the traffic conditions. Press or pull thesoft-top switch again in order to open or closethe soft top fully.

Opening and closingX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 119).

X To open: pull soft-top switch: until thesoft top is fully opened.The Convertible Top in OperationConvertible Top in Operationmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.If, when opening, you drive at speeds above30 mph (50 km/h), the opening procedureis stopped and in the multifunction displayyou see the Open/Close ConvertibleOpen/Close ConvertibleTop CompletelyTop Completely message. Reduce yourspeed again to below 30 mph (50 km/h)and pull the soft-top switch again to openthe soft top fully.

X To close: press and hold soft-top switch:until the soft top is fully closed.The Convertible Top in OperationConvertible Top in Operationmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.If, when closing, you drive at speeds above30mph (50 km/h), the closing procedure isstopped and in the multifunction displayyou see the Open/Close ConvertibleOpen/Close ConvertibleTop CompletelyTop Completely message. Reduce speedback to under 30 mph (50 km/h) and pushthe soft top switch again to fully close thesoft top.

Soft top (Roadster) 79

Openingandclosing

Z

Opening and closing using the Smart-Key

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the soft top, there isa risk that parts of the body could becometrapped by moving parts such as the roofmechanism, the trunk lid, or the side win-dows. There is a risk of injury.When opening or closing the roof, make surethat no parts of the body are in the vicinity ofmoving parts. Release the switch if somebodybecomes trapped.

Opening and closing

i The SmartKey must be close to the driv-er's door handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X To open: press and hold the% buttonon the SmartKey until the soft top is fullyopened.The Convertible Top in OperationConvertible Top in Operationmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

X To close: press and hold the& buttonon the SmartKey until the soft top is fullyclosed.The Convertible Top in OperationConvertible Top in Operationmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play. The soft top and the side windowsclose.

Relocking the soft top

G WARNINGIf you do not lock the closed soft top, it mayopen during a journey. This could cause you tolose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Only drive with the soft top fully open orlocked closed.

The soft top is not locked if:Rthe Convertible Top in OperationConvertible Top in Operationmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.Ryou hear a warning tone for up to ten sec-onds when pulling away or while driving.

You can lock the soft top again if it is notlocked fully.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soonas possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 119).

X Press the soft-top switch.

Installing/removing the wind screen

G WARNINGIf the wind screen is incorrectly installed, itcould detach itself during a journey andendanger other road users. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.Install the wind screen as described. Do notplace any objects on top of the installed windscreen.

! Install or remove the wind screen onlywhen the soft top is open. You could oth-erwise damage the wind screen or the vehi-cle interior.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wind screens which have beentested and approved for Mercedes-Benzvehicles. This helps to prevent damage tothe vehicle.

The wind screen protects against wind whendriving with the soft top open. It is securedbetween the roll bars.The wind screen is in a bag on the tank par-tition wall in the trunk.X Open the trunk.

80 Soft top (Roadster)Op

eningandclosing

X Detach wind screen bag: from fourpress-studs; on the tank partition wall.

X Remove the wind screen from wind screenbag:.

X Attach wind screen bag: to the tank par-tition wall again.

X To install: fold both fastening levers;inwards in the direction of the arrow.

X Push wind screen: into the recessbetween the roll bars up to the lockingpoint.

X Fold both fastening levers; outwards.X To remove: fold both fastening levers;inwards in the direction of the arrow.

X Pull wind screen: upward.X Detach thewind screen bag, remove it fromthe trunk and put the wind screen back intoit.

X Attach the wind screen bag to the tank par-tition wall in the trunk again.

Soft top (Roadster) 81

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the soft top

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The soft top will notopen or close.

Key position 2 is not selected.X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stop button.

The brake pedal has not been depressed with the vehicle station-ary.X Depress the brake pedal.

The soft-top mechanism or control system is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The soft top has been opened and closed several times in a row.The soft-top drive has been deactivated automatically for safetyreasons.You can open and close the soft top again after approximately tenminutes.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.

82 Soft top (Roadster)Op

eningandclosing

Useful information .............................. 84Correct driver's seat position ............ 84Seats .................................................... 85Steering wheel .................................... 88Mirrors ................................................. 90Memory function ................................. 92

83

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 23).

Correct driver's seat position

Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjust-ment (Y page 85).X Make sure that seat= is adjusted prop-erly.Seat adjustment (Y page 86)When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright posi-tion.

Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.Ryou have moved the backrest to analmost vertical position.Ryou have set the seat cushion angle sothat your thighs are gently supported.Ryou can depress the pedals properly.

Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 88).X Make sure that steering wheel: isadjusted properly.Adjusting the steering wheel(Y page 89)When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steeringwheel with yourarms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in the instru-ment cluster clearly.

Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 47).X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 49).The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of yourshoulderRbe routed in your pelvic area across thehip joints

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmir-ror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 90) insuch a way that you have a good view ofroad and traffic conditions.

X Memory function: store the seat, steeringwheel and exterior mirror settings(Y page 92).

84 Correct driver's seat positionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position.When brak-

ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed andadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position.When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rdo not spill any liquids on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seat

Seats 85

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

heating should also not to be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on theseats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating mate-rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-ers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmoving the seats back. There is a risk thatthe seats and/or the objects could be dam-aged.

Adjusting the seats manually

Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentX Lift handle: and slide the seat forwardsor backwards.

X Release lever: again.Make sure that you hear the seat engage inposition.

Backrest angleX Relieve the pressure on the backrest.X Pull lever; up and adjust the backrest tothe desired angle.

X Release lever; again.The seat backrest must audibly engage.

Seat heightX Pull up or push down lever= repeatedlyuntil the seat has reached the desiredheight.

Seat adjustment

: Backrest angle; Seat fore-and-aft adjustment= Seat cushion angle? Seat height

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 92).

Adjusting the lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the seat so as toprovide optimum support for your back.

86 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

: To adjust the upper back support; To adjust the contour of the backrest in

the lumbar region= To adjust the lateral structure and support

of the seatX Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

i If, after a certain amount of time, the seatno longer has the desired contour, repeatthe adjustment.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Activating/deactivating

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximately fiveminutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

Problems with the seat heatingThe seat heating has switched off prema-turely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle'selectrical system voltage is too low becausetoo many electrical consumers are switchedon.X Switch off electrical consumers that you donot need, such as the rear windowdefroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, theseat heating will switch back on automati-cally.

Seats 87

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

AIRSCARF (Roadster)

G WARNINGWhen AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot aircan flow from the vents in the head restraints.This could result in burns in the immediatevicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.Reduce the heater output before it becomestoo hot.

The AIRSCARF function warms the head andneck area of vehicle occupants with warm air.Thewarmair flows out of the holes in the headrestraints.The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press button:.Three red indicator lamps in the button lightup. The blower starts up after a preheatingphase of seven seconds.

X Press button: repeatedly until thedesired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

You can use the adjustable fins on the headrestraint to adjust the height of the current ofair blown out according to your height.Make sure that there are no objects coveringthe intake grille on the back of the driver'sseat backrest.

i The blower continues running for sevenseconds to cool down the heating ele-ments.

i If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARFmay switch off.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf the steering wheel is unlocked while thevehicle is in motion, it could change positionunexpectedly. This could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Before starting off, make sure the steeringwheel is locked. Never unlock the steeringwheel while the vehicle is in motion.

88 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the steering wheel

: To adjust the steering wheel position(fore-and-aft adjustment)

; To adjust the steering wheel height

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature(Y page 89)RStoring settings (Y page 92)

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notesThe EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes gettingin and out of your vehicle easier.

G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGIf children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture, they can become trapped, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards whenyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the KEYLESS-GO start function in position 1Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey isin position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock

i The steering wheel only moves upwards ifit has not already reached the upper endstop.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-ingThe steering wheel is moved to the lastselected position when you:Rclose the driver's door andRpress the Start/Stop button onceWhen you close the driver's door with theignition switched on, the steering wheel isalso automatically moved to the previouslyset position.The last position of the steering wheel isstored after each manual setting or when youstore the setting with the memory function(Y page 92).

Steering wheel 89

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature istriggered in an accident, the steering columnwill move upwards when the driver's door isopened. This occurs irrespective of the posi-tion of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Thismakes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescuethe occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature isonly operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-ture is activated in the on-board computer.

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glaremode: flick anti-glare switch:forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.The exterior mirrors are heated automaticallyif the rear window defroster is switched onand the outside temperature is low. Mirrorheating lasts up to 10 minutes.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrorsmanually by switching on the rear windowdefroster.

X Select key position 1 or 2 with the Start/Stop button.

X Press button: for the left-hand exteriormirror or button; for the right-hand exte-rior mirror.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button= as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button= up, down, or tothe left or right until you have adjusted theexterior mirror to the desired position. You

90 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

should have a good overview of traffic con-ditions.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically

X Select key position 1 or 2 with the Start/Stop button.

X Briefly press button?.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while the vehicle is inmotion, as they may otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in theexterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors mustbe reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwisenot fold in when you select the "Fold in mir-rors when locking" function in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 160).X Select key position 1 using the Start/Stopbutton.

X Briefly press button?.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyIf the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 160):

Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the out-side.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle andthen open the driver's or front-passengerdoor.

i The mirrors do not fold out if they havebeen folded in manually.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically foldingexterior mirrors:move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-rior mirrors: press and hold mirror-foldingbutton until you hear a click and then themirrors engage in position (Y page 91).The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 90).

Automatic anti-glare mirrorsThe rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if the following conditions aremetsimultaneously:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes thesensor in the rear-view mirror.

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged.

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking positionYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as you

Mirrors 91

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

engage reverse gear. You can store this posi-tion.

X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X Press button; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.

i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving posi-tion.

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side with the corresponding but-ton (Y page 90).

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 6 mph(10 km/h)Rabout ten seconds after you have disen-gaged reverse gearRif you press button: for the exterior mir-ror on the driver's side

Memory function

Storing settings

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

With the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for three dif-ferent people.

92 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rseat and backrest positionRdriver's side: steering wheel positionRdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-rors on the driver's and front-passengersides

X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X Adjust the seat (Y page 86).X On the driver's side, adjust the steeringwheel (Y page 89) and the exterior mirrors(Y page 90).

X Press memory button M and one of thestorage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selected pre-set position. A tone sounds when the set-tings have been completed.

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the relevant storage posi-tion button 1,2 or 3, until the seat, steeringwheel and exterior mirrors are in the storedposition.

i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionbutton.

Memory function 93

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

94

Useful information .............................. 96Exterior lighting .................................. 96Interior lighting ................................... 99Replacing bulbs ................................. 100Windshield wipers ............................ 101

95

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 23).

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switchedon even during the daytime. In some coun-tries, operation of the headlamps varies dueto legal requirements and self-imposed obli-gations.

Driving abroadConverting to symmetrical low beamwhen driving abroad: switch the headlampsto symmetrical low beam in countries inwhich traffic drives on the opposite side of theroad to the country where the vehicle is reg-istered. This prevents glare to oncoming traf-fic. Symmetrical lights do not illuminate aslarge an area of the edge of the road.Have the headlamps converted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, as close to the borderas possible before driving in these countries.Converting to asymmetrical low beamafter returning: have the headlamps con-verted back to asymmetrical low beam at aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center, as soon as pos-sible after crossing the border again.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 98)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 158)

Light switch

Operation

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-

led by the light sensor5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inposition 0.

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or other

96 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

causes of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.Ã is the favored light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selected accord-ing to the brightness of the ambient light(exception: poor visibility due to weather con-ditions such as fog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.RWith the engine running: if you have acti-vated the daytime running lamps functionvia the on-board computer, the daytimerunning lamps or the low-beam headlampsand parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.

Only for Canada:The daytime running lamps improve the visi-bility of your vehicle during the day. The day-time running lamps function is required by lawinCanada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if youmove the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in bright ambient light: if youturn the light switch to T, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.USA only:The daytime running lamps improve the visi-bility of your vehicle during the day. To do this,the daytime running lamps function must be

switched on using the on-board computer(Y page 158).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

i In the USA, the daytime running lamps aredeactivated upon delivery from the factory.

X To switch on automatic headlampmode: turn the light switch toÃ.

Low-beam headlampsEven if the light sensor does not detect that itis dark, the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps switch on when the ignition isswitched on and the light switch is set to theL position. This is a particularly usefulfunction in the event of rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The greenL indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessively dis-charged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch toT.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illumi-nated.

Exterior lighting 97

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is inposition 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow; or?.

High-beam headlampsX To switch on the high-beamheadlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theà position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched on when it is darkand the engine is running.

The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the high-beam head-lamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam head-lamps:move the combination switch backto its normal position.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

High-beam flasherX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in theignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch briefly in thedirection of arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployed orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from aspeed of more than 45 mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a standstill.

X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.

98 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-matically if the vehicle exceeds a speed of6mph(10 km/h) again after a full brake appli-cation.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.

Headlamp cleaning systemThe headlamps are cleaned automatically ifthe "Wipe with washer fluid" function is oper-ated five times (Y page 101) while the lightsare on and the engine is running. When youswitch off the ignition, the automatic head-lamp cleaning system is reset and counting isresumed from 0.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideThe headlamps may fog up on the inside ifthere is high atmospheric humidity.X Drive with the headlamps switched on.The level of moisture diminishes, depend-ing on the length of the journey and theweather conditions (humidity and temper-ature).

If the level of moisture does not diminish:X Have the headlamps checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Overhead control panel: | Switches the automatic interior

lighting control on/off; p Switches the right-hand reading

lamp on/off= c Switches the interior lighting on/off? p Switches the left-hand reading lamp

on/off

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeunless the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

Automatic interior lighting controlX To activate/deactivate: press the |button.When the automatic interior lightingcontrol is activated, the button is flush withthe overhead control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock

Interior lighting 99

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

The interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the igni-tion lock. You can activate this delayedswitch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 159).

Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the interior lighting on/off:press the c button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off:press the p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsiveemergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using thekey.

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notes

Xenon bulbs

G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can getan electric shock if you remove the cover ofthe Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con-tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electrical con-tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work onthe Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs.You can recognize this by the following: thecone of light from the Xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back againwhen you start the engine. For this to be

observed, the lights must be switched onbefore starting the engine.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Other bulbs

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbsthat you cannot replace. Replace only thebulbs listed (Y page 101). Have the bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself changed at aqualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance changing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs withyour bare hands. Even minor contaminationcan burn into the glass surface and reducethe service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-free cloth or only touch the base of the bulbwhen installing.Only use bulbs of the correct type.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Changing the front bulbsYou cannot replace the bulbs at the frontyourself. Contact a qualified specialist work-shop which has the necessary specialistknowledge and tools to carry out the workrequired. Mercedes-Benz recommends that

100 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor this purpose.

Changing the rear bulbs

License plate lampThe only rear bulbs you can change are theW 5 W license plate lamp bulbs.

X Switch off the lights.X Lever lamp housing: out of the frameusing a screwdriver.

X Unscrew the bulb holder from the lamphousing and pull out the bulb.

X Insert a new bulb into the bulb holder andscrew the bulb holder into the lamp hous-ing.

X Press the lamp housing back into the frameuntil it engages.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes placewhenthe windshield is dry.If it is necessary to switch on thewindshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse washer fluid when operating the wind-shield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/î Towipe thewind-

shield using washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: dueto optical influences and the windshieldbecoming dirty in dry weather conditions,the windshield wipers may be activatedinadvertently. This could then damage thewindshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automatically accord-ing to the intensity of the rain. In the Åposition, the rain sensor is more sensitive

Windshield wipers 101

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

than in the Ä position, causing the wind-shield wipers to wipe more frequently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshieldwill no longer be wiped properly. This couldprevent you from observing the traffic condi-tions. Replace the wiper blades twice a year,ideally in spring and fall.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.Never fold awindshieldwiper armwithout awiper blade back onto the windshield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe windshield wiper arm without a wiperblade and it falls onto the windshield, thewindshield may be damaged by the force ofthe impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Replacing the wiper blades

Removing the wiper bladesX Switch off the engine.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.X Set the windshield wiper to the ° posi-tion.

X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedlyuntil the windshield wipers start.

X When the wiper arms have reached a ver-tical position, press the Start/Stop button.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-shield until it engages.

X Set the wiper blade at right angles to thewiper arm.

X Remove the wiper blade from the retaineron the wiper arm in the direction of thearrow.

Installing the wiper bladesX Slide the new wiper blade into the retaineron the wiper arm in the opposite directionto the arrow.

X Turn the wiper blade parallel to the wiperarm.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-shield.

102 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshieldwiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The windshield washerfluid from the spraynozzles no longer hitsthe center of the wind-shield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work-shop.

The wiper arms are onthe windshield.

The wiper arms have been moved by an external force.X Select key position 2 (ignition) with the Start/Stop button.The wiper arms move back down automatically.

Windshield wipers 103

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

104

Useful information ............................ 106Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 106Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 108Setting the air vents ......................... 113

105

Climatecontrol

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 23).

Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows could other-wise fog up.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode onlybrieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-cation functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

The automatic climate control regulates thetemperature and the humidity in the vehicleinterior and filters undesirable substancesout of the air.Coupe: dual-zone automatic climate controlis only operational when the engine is run-ning. Optimum operation is only achievedwith the side windows closed.Roadster: dual-zone automatic climatecontrol is only operational when the engine isrunning. Optimum operation is only achievedwith the side windows and roof closed.

i When the weather is warm, ventilate thevehicle for a brief period. This will speed upthe cooling process and the desired interiortemperature will be reached more quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most par-ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol-lutants and odors. A clogged filter reducesthe amount of air supplied to the vehicleinterior. For this reason, you should alwaysobserve the interval for replacing the filter,which is specified in the MaintenanceBooklet. As it depends on environmentalconditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, theinterval may be shorter than stated in theMaintenance Booklet.

106 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Canada only: To set the temperature, left (Y page 110); To set climate control to automatic (Y page 110)= To switch climate control on/off (Y page 108)? To switch the MONO function on/offA To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 108)B To defrost the windshield (Y page 111)C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 113)D To set the temperature, right (Y page 110)E To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 112)F To increase the airflow (Y page 111)G To reduce the airflow (Y page 111)H DisplayI To set the air distribution (Y page 110)

USA only: To set the temperature, left; To set climate control to automatic (Y page 110)= To switch climate control on/off (Y page 108)? To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 111)A To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 108)B To defrost the windshield (Y page 111)

Overview of climate control systems 107

Climatecontrol

C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 113)D To set the temperature, right (Y page 110)E To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 112)F To increase the airflow (Y page 111)G To reduce the airflow (Y page 111)H DisplayI To set the air distribution (Y page 110)

Optimum use of dual-zone automaticclimate controlThe following contains instructions and rec-ommendations to enable you to get the mostout of your automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theà and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in theà and¿ buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the MONO function if you want toadopt the temperature and air distributionsettings from the driver's side for all cli-mate control zones. The indicator lamp intheº button lights up.

Operating the climate control sys-tems

Switching climate control on/off

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, theair supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. The windows could fog up.Therefore, switch off climate control onlybriefly

i Activate climate control primarily usingtheà button (Y page 110).

Activating/deactivatingX Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 119).

X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

X To deactivate: press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button lightsup.

Activating/deactivating cooling withair dehumidification

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-tion function only briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-tion is only available when the engine is run-ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled anddehumidified according to the temperatureselected.

108 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-tion.

Activating/deactivatingX To activate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button goesout. The "Cooling with air dehumidification"function has a delayed switch-off feature.

Operating the climate control systems 109

Climatecontrol

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The indicator lamp inthe¿ buttonflashes three times orremains off. The "Cool-ing with air dehumidifi-cation" function cannotbe switched on.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to amalfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIn automatic mode, the set temperature iscontrolled automatically. The system auto-matically regulates the temperature of thedispensed air, the airflow and the air distri-bution.The automatic mode functions optimallywhen the "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is activated. If necessary, coolingwith air dehumidification can be deactivated.If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-tion function only briefly.

Activating/switchingX Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 119).

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.

X To switch to manual mode: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout. Automatic air distribution and airfloware deactivated.

Setting the temperatureDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 119).

X To increase/reduce: turn controls: andD clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 107).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settings¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsP Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

ventsS Directs air through the center, side and

footwell vents_ Directs the airflow to the entire vehicle

interiorb Directs air through the defroster,

center and side air ventsa Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents

110 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Setting the air distributionX Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 119).

X Press the_ button repeatedly until thedesired symbol appears in the display.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout. Automatic control is deactivated andthe air distribution is controlled accordingto the selected setting.

Setting the airflowX Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 119).

X To increase/reduce: press theK orI button.

Switching the mono function on/offThe MONO function is only available in vehi-cles for Canada.You can use the MONO function to adopt thetemperature and air distribution settings onthe driver's side for the front-passenger side.X Press theº button.The indicator lamp in theº button lightsup or goes out.

Defrosting the windshieldi You should only select the "Windshielddefrosting" function until the windshield isclear again.

X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 119).

X To activate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button lightsup.The system automatically switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperature

Rair distribution to the windshield andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode off

X To deactivate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

orX Press theà button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Turn controls: orD clockwise or coun-ter-clockwise (Y page 107).

orX Press theK orI button.

Switching maximum cooling on/offThe MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.When you activate MAX COOL, climatecontrol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode onX To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To deactivate: press theÙ buttonagain.The indicator lamp in the button goes out.The previously selected settings come intoeffect again.i To deactivate MAX COOL press the^,Ã, or¬ button.

Operating the climate control systems 111

Climatecontrol

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the "Cooling with air dehumidifi-cation" function¿.

X Activate automatic modeÃ.X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe "Windshield defrosting" function¬.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Press the_ button repeatedly until theO orP symbol appears in the dis-play.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,the rear window defroster switches off auto-matically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-dow defroster may switch off.

Activating/deactivatingX Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 119).

X Press the¤ button.The indicator lamp in the¤ button lightsup or goes out.

112 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The rear windowdefroster has deacti-vated prematurely orcannot be activated.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. readinglamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear windowdefroster can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recircula-tion mode

General notesYou can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odors are entering the vehiclefrom outside. The air already inside the vehi-cle will then be recirculated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can fog up more quickly, in particu-lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu-lation mode briefly to prevent the windowsfrom fogging up.

Activating/deactivatingX Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 119).

X To activate: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button lightsup.

i Air-recirculation mode is activated auto-matically at high outside temperatures.When air-recirculation mode is activatedautomatically, the indicator lamp in theg button is not lit.Outside air is added after about 30minutes.

X To deactivate: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button goesout.

i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-matically:Rafter approximately five minutes at out-side temperatures below approximately41 ‡ (5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if cool-ing with air dehumidification is deacti-vatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at out-side temperatures above approximately41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehu-midification" function is activated

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

Setting the air vents 113

Climatecontrol

Z

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet on the right-hand side ofthe hood free of blockages, such as ice,snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grillesin the vehicle interior.

i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjustthe sliders of the air vents to the centerposition.

Setting the center air vents

1 To open the center air vent2 To close the center air vent= Center air vent, right? Center air vent, leftX To open the center air vent: turn theadjuster in center air vent= or? in thedirection of the arrow to position1.

X To close the center air vent: turn theadjuster in center air vent= or? in thedirection of the arrow to position2.

Setting the side air vents

1 To open the side air vent2 To close the side air vent= Side window defroster vent? Side air ventX To open the side air vent: turn theadjuster in side air vent? in the directionof the arrow to position1.

X To close the side air vent: turn theadjuster in side air vent? in the directionof the arrow to position2.

Setting the blower output of the AIR-SCARF vents (Roadster)

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

G WARNINGWhen AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot aircan flow from the vents in the head restraints.This could result in burns in the immediatevicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.Reduce the heater output before it becomestoo hot.

114 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

You can adjust the blower output of AIR-SCARF vents: using the AIRSCARF button(Y page 88).

Setting the air vents 115

Climatecontrol

Z

116

Useful information ............................ 118Notes on breaking-in a newvehicle .. 118Driving ............................................... 118AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speedsports transmission ......................... 121AMG button (SETUP) ......................... 128Refueling ............................................ 128Parking ............................................... 131Driving tips ........................................ 134Driving systems ................................ 138

117

Drivingandparking

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 23).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesNew brake pads/linings only reach their opti-mum braking effect after several hundredkilometers of driving. Until that time, youmayneed to use increased brake pedal pressurewhile braking. This also applies after thebrake discs or the brake pads/linings havebeen replaced.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi-cle and engine speeds for the first1,000 miles (1,500 km).RDo not drive faster than 85 mph(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt-tle, during this period. Do not exceedÔ ofthe maximum permitted engine speed foreach gear.RSelect the manual drive programM in goodtime.

RDo not carry out a RACE START.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear tobrake the vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the acceleratorpedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-down).ROnly select the shift range limits 3, 2 or 1when driving slowly, e.g. in mountainousterrain.

After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you canincrease the engine speed gradually and bringthe vehicle to full speed.

i You should also observe these breaking-in notes if your vehicle's engine or trans-mission has been replaced.

i Always observe the respective speed lim-its.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

118 DrivingDrivingandparking

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature. The oper-ating temperature has been reached whenthe engine oil temperature display in theon-board computer's AMG menu no longerflashes.Only shift into reverse gear when the vehi-cle is stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

! During a cold start with low engine oiltemperatures (below 32‡) (0†), the max-imum engine speed is restricted in order toprotect the engine. To protect the engineand maintain smooth engine operation,avoid driving at full throttle when theengine is cold.

Key positions

KEYLESS-GO start functionYou can switch the engine on and off with theStart/Stop button. For this, the SmartKeymust be inside the vehicle. The Start/Stopbutton is located in the center console and isilluminated when the vehicle is unlocked.Pressing the Start/Stop button several timesin succession corresponds to the differentkey positions in the ignition lock. This is onlythe case if you are not depressing the brakepedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-ately.If there is a SmartKey in the ignition lock, thistakes precedence over the KEYLESS-GO startfunction.

X Position 0: if Start/Stop button: has notyet been pressed, this corresponds to theSmartKey being removed from the ignition.

X Position 1: press Start/Stop button:.You can now activate the windshield wip-ers, for example.

If you press Start/Stop button: twice whenin this position and the driver's door is open,the power supply is deactivated again.X Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stop but-ton: twice.

The power supply is switched off again if:Ryou press Start/Stop button: once whenin this positionRthe driver's door is open

SmartKeyYou can also start the vehicle with the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.The ignition lock is located in the rear stow-age space of the center console.

Driving 119

Drivingandparking

Z

g To remove the SmartKey1 Power supply for some consumers, such

as the windshield wipers2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni-tion lock even if it is not the correct Smart-Key for the vehicle. The ignition is notswitched on. The engine cannot be started.

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

i Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhen starting the engine.

Starting procedure with the Start/Stopbutton

i The Start/Stop button can be used tostart the vehicle without inserting theSmartKey into the ignition lock. Youmerelyneed to carry the SmartKey on your person.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once(Y page 119).The engine starts.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyIf the Start/Stop button is inoperative, youcan also start the vehicle using the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 119) and release it assoon as the engine is running.

Pulling away

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sportstransmission

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

i It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position, if:Rthe engine is running andRyou depress the brake pedalOnly then is the parking lock released. If thebrake pedal is not depressed, the E-SELECT

120 DrivingDrivingandparking

lever can still bemoved but the parking lockremains engaged.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Use the E-SELECT lever to shift the trans-mission to position D or R.

X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.The electric parking brake is automaticallyreleased (Y page 133).i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down. The automatic door lock canalso be deactivated (Roadster only).

Hill start assistHill start assist will aid you when pulling awayon a hill. It holds the vehicle for a short timeafter you have removed your foot from thebrake pedal. This gives you enough time tomove your foot from the brake pedal to theaccelerator pedal and depress it before thevehicle begins to roll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

X Take your foot off the brake pedal.i Once you have taken your foot off thebrake pedal, the vehicle is held for aroundone second.

X Pull away.Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.

Rthe vehicle is secured with the electricparking brake.RESP® is malfunctioning.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sportstransmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

E-SELECT selector lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

! If the engine speed is too high or if thevehicle is rolling, do not shift the transmis-sion directly from D to R, from R to D ordirectly to P.Do not open the driver's door while thevehicle is in motion. At low speeds in trans-mission position D or R, park position P isotherwise engaged automatically.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission 121

Drivingandparking

Z

The transmission could be damaged.

i The E-SELECT lever always returns to itsoriginal position.The current transmission positionP,R,N orD appears in the transmission position dis-play in the multifunction display.

If youwish to select a transmission position orto disengage park position P, the enginemustbe running.

Engaging park position PX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Press the P button in the center console.

i Park position P is disengaged if you:Rdepress the brake pedal andRpush the E-SELECT lever forwards orback to the first point of resistance

The transmission shifts to neutral N.To shift directly from P to R:X Depress the brake pedal and push theE-SELECT lever forwards past the firstpoint of resistance.

To shift directly from P to D:X Depress the brake pedal and push theE-SELECT lever back past the firstpoint of resistance.

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position is engaged automatically in thefollowing circumstances:Rif you switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's or front-passenger door.Rif you remove the SmartKey from the igni-tion lock.Rif you open the door while traveling at lowspeed in transmission position D or R.

Shifting to neutral NX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the E-SELECT lever forwards or backto the first point of resistance.

i If you move the E-SELECT lever to Nbefore switching off the engine, the trans-mission remains in N for approximately30 minutes. If you open the driver's orfront-passenger door during this period,the transmission automatically shifts to P.The transmission remains in N if:Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock andRyou use the E‑SELECT lever to shift thetransmission to N before switching theengine off

This still applies if you open the driver's orfront-passenger door.Further information is available in the "Carwash" section (Y page 223).

Engaging reverse gear RX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the E-SELECT lever forward past thefirst point of resistance.

Shifting to transmission position DX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal.

X Push the E-SELECT lever back past the firstpoint of resistance.

122 AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmissionDrivingandparking

Transmission position and drive pro-gram display

Display in transmission positions P, Rand N

: Transmission position: currently selectedtransmission position is displayed ininverted colors

; Drive program (C/S/S+/M)In addition to drive program; being shownin the multifunction display, the currentlyselected drive program is indicated in red onthe drive program selector switch.

Displaywhen in transmissionpositionD

: Transmission position; Gear= Drive program (C/S/S+)If you have restricted the shift range, thetransmission position and the selected shiftrange, e.g. D3, are shown at position:.

Displaywhen in transmissionpositionDand manual drive program M

: Gear; Drive program

Transmission positions

B Park positionDo not shift the transmission intoposition P unless the vehicle is sta-tionary. The parking lock shouldnot be used as a brake when park-ing. Always apply the electronicparking brake in addition to theparking lock in order to secure thevehicle.In the event of a malfunction of thevehicle's electronics, the transmis-sion may lock in position P.Have the vehicle electronicschecked at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, immedi-ately.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission 123

Drivingandparking

Z

A NeutralNo power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it.Do not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. The transmissioncould otherwise be damaged.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:only shift the transmission to posi-tion N if the vehicle is in danger ofskidding, e.g. on icy roads.

7 DriveThe transmission shifts into driveprograms (C/S/S+) automatically.All forward gears are available.

Changing gearThe transmission shifts into individual gearsautomatically. This is determined by:Rdrive position DRthe selected drive program (C/S/S+)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speedRa shift range restriction, if selectedThe shift points primarily depend on:Rthe position of the accelerator pedalLittle throttle: early upshifts; high throttle:late upshiftsRthe driving dynamicsA dynamic driving style with high longitudi-nal and lateral acceleration delays the shiftpoints to higher engine speeds.

Driving tips

Double-clutch functionWhen shifting down, the double-clutch func-tion is active regardless of the currentlyselected drive program. The double-clutch

function reduces the load change reaction onthe drive axle. The sound generated by thedouble-clutch function and its characteristicsdepend on the drive program selected.

Kickdown

i Kickdown is not available in manual driveprogram M.

Use kickdown for maximum acceleration.X In the automatic drive programs, depressthe accelerator pedal beyond the pressurepoint.Depending on the selected drive program,the transmission shifts to the lowest gearpermissible to give optimal acceleration.

Drive program selectorWith the drive program selector switch, youcan choose from a range of different trans-mission configurations or select the RACESTART drive mode.

Drive pro-gram

Characteristic

C ControlledEfficiency

Comfort-oriented, opti-mum-economy engineand transmission settings

S Sport Sporty engine and trans-mission settings

S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty engineand transmission settings

124 AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmissionDrivingandparking

Drive pro-gram

Characteristic

M Manual Manual gear shifting

Driving mode

RS RACESTART

Optimal vehicle accelera-tion from a standstill

X Turn drive program selector switch: untilthe desired drive program is shown in themultifunction display.

i In addition to the drive program beingshown in the multifunction display, the cur-rently selected drive program is indicatedin red on the drive program selector switch.

i RS cannot be selected during normal driv-ing. For further information on RACESTART, see (Y page 125).

Steering wheel paddle shiftersIn transmission position D, you can use thesteering wheel paddle shifters to restrict orderestrict the transmission shift range. Oneof the automatic drive programs C, S and S+must be selected in order to do so.In manual drive program M, you need tochange gear yourself using the steeringwheelpaddle shifters. The transmission shifts downautomatically at low engine speeds.

i In manual drive programM, the transmis-sion shift and response times are signifi-cantly shorter with sportier and moreaggressive gear changes.

: Left steering wheel paddle shifter(DOWN): shift down/restrict shift range

; Right steering wheel paddle shifter (UP):shift up/derestrict shift range

RACE STARTRACE START enables optimal accelerationfrom a standing start under suitable high-griproad surface conditions.RACE START is intended solely for activationon dedicated race circuits.

Conditions for activationYou can activate RACE START if:Rthe doors are closed.Rthe engine is running and the engine andtransmission are at operating temperature.(Y page 160)RSPORT handling mode is switched on.(Y page 56)Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-aheadposition.Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brakepedal is depressed (left foot).Rthe transmission is set to D.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission 125

Drivingandparking

Z

Activating RACE STARTX Depress the brake pedal with your left footand keep it depressed.

X Turn the drive program selector switchclockwise (Y page 124) until the RS indi-cator on the switch lights up in red.The multifunction display shows the mes-sage RACE STARTRACE START Confirm: PaddleConfirm: PaddleUPUP Cancel: Paddle DOWNCancel: Paddle DOWN.i If the conditions for activation are not ful-filled, RACE START is canceled. The RACERACESTARTSTART NotNot PossiblePossiblemessage appears inthe multifunction display.

X To cancel: pull the left-hand steeringwheelpaddle shifter (DOWN) (Y page 125).The multifunction display shows the RACERACESTART CanceledSTART Canceled message.

X To confirm: pull the right-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (UP) (Y page 125).The RACE START Available DepressRACE START Available Depressgas pedalgas pedal message appears in the multi-function display.i If you do not depress the acceleratorpedal within a few seconds, RACE START iscanceled. The multifunction display showsthe RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message.

X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.The engine speed is increased.The RACE START Release brake toRACE START Release brake tostartstart message appears in the multifunc-tion display.i If you do not release the brake pedalwithin a few seconds, RACE START is can-celed. The multifunction display shows theRACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message.

X Take your foot off the brake pedal whilekeeping the accelerator pedal fullydepressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximum accel-eration.The RACERACE STARTSTART ActiveActivemessage appearsin the multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehiclereaches a speed of approximately 30 mph

(50 km/h). Drive program S+ is activated.SPORT handling mode remains switched on.RACE START is deactivated immediately ifyou release the accelerator pedal duringRACE START or if any of the activation condi-tions are no longer fulfilled. The RACERACE STARTSTARTNot PossibleNot Possible or RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceledmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly within ashort period of time, it is only availableagain after the vehicle has been driven acertain distance.

Automatic drive programDrive program C is characterized by the fol-lowing:Rcomfort-oriented engine and transmissionsettingsRoptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe transmission shifting up soonerRthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fullyRincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexampleRthe transmission shifting up sooner; Thisresults in the vehicle being driven at lowerengine speeds and the wheels being lesslikely to spin

Drive programsS andS+ are characterized bythe following:Rsporty engine and transmission settingsRthe transmission shifting up later and shift-ing down dynamicallyRas a result of the later transmissionupshifts, the fuel consumption may behigherRif a period of dynamic driving is followed byan extended phase with a constant accel-erator pedal position, the vehicle shifts up

126 AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmissionDrivingandparking

to a higher gear. This optimizes fuel con-sumption

If a gentle driving style is adopted in auto-matic drive programs C/S/S+, the drive pro-gram settings are adjusted to optimize fuelconsumption. Depending on the operatingconditions, the transmission shifts to a highergear.

Shift ranges

IntroductionIn certain driving situations, it is recom-mended that you restrict the shift range. Theset shift range appears in the instrument clu-ster's multifunction display (Y page 123). Thetransmission only shifts to the gear displayedin the instrument cluster.When the maximum engine speed is reached,the transmission shifts up a gear in the auto-matic programs C/S/S+. Gear restriction iscorrespondingly increased by one gear.

Driving situation

= The braking effect of the engine canbe utilized in this position

5 You can use the braking effect ofthe engine on downhill gradientsand for driving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions

4 To use the braking effect of theengine on extremely steep downhillgradients and on long downhillstretches

Derestricting the shift range/shiftingupX Pull the right steering wheel paddle (UP).The shift range is derestricted. If you aredriving in manual drive program M, thetransmission shifts up to the next gear.

Restricting the shift range/shiftingdownX Pull the left steering wheel paddle (DOWN).The transmission shifts down one gear andrestricts the shift range to this gear.If the engine speed in manual drive pro-gramM is too high, it is not possible to shiftdown. If you pull the left-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (DOWN)(Y page 128), the two red segments in theinstrument cluster flash.

Clearing the shift range restrictionX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (UP) until the number for the geardisappears from the multifunction display.

orX Use the E-SELECT lever to shift the trans-mission to position D.The transmission shifts from the currentshift range directly to D.

Selecting the ideal shift rangeX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter repeatedly until the function is acti-vated.Depending on the selected drive program,the transmission shifts to a gear whichallows ideal acceleration and deceleration.To do this, the transmission shifts downone or more gears.

Manual drive programi In manual drive programM, the transmis-sion shift and response times are signifi-cantly shorter with sportier and moreaggressive gear changes.

In manual drive program M, you need tochange gear yourself using the steeringwheelpaddle shifters (Y page 125). The transmis-sion only shifts down automatically at lowengine speeds depending on the respectivegear.

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sports transmission 127

Drivingandparking

Z

! In manual drive programM, the transmis-sion does not shift up automatically evenwhen the engine limiting speed for the cur-rent gear is reached. When the engine lim-iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cutto prevent the engine from overrevving.Always make sure that the engine speeddoes not reach the red area of the tachom-eter and observe the upshift indicator.There is otherwise a risk of engine damage.

X To activate the manual drive program:turn the drive program selector switch untilM appears in the instrument cluster's mul-tifunction display.M lights up in red on the drive programselector switch.

X To deactivate the manual drive pro-gram: turn the drive program selectorswitch and select another drive program.

Upshift indicatorThe upshift indicator is a four-stage displaydesigned to assist you in sporty driving.

The upshift indicator allows you to recognizethe ideal shift point for dynamic acceleration.White segments: and yellow segment;light up in succession from left to right.When red segments= light up and the "up"message appears in the multifunction dis-play, the ideal shift point has been reached:X Shift up using the right-hand steeringwheelpaddle shifter (UP) as quickly as possible.The vehicle shifts up to the next gear.

i If you continue to increase the enginespeed without shifting up in time, the fuelsupply is shut off to protect the engine. Thisresults in abruptly reduced acceleration.

Display for downshift overrideYou cannot shift down with the left steeringwheel paddle shifter if the engine speed is toohigh due to a downshift. If you then pull theleft steering wheel paddle shifter, both redsegments= light up briefly.

AMG button (SETUP)

With the AMG button, you can call up andstore a default drive program setting and thedefault suspension tuning.

X To store: press and hold AMG button:until you hear a tone.

X To call up: press AMG button:.The stored drive program is selected.

X To display: briefly press AMG button:.The multifunction display shows the SETUPin the AMG menu (Y page 160).

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.

128 RefuelingDrivingandparking

You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.Further information on fuel and on fuel gradescan be found in the "Fuel" section(Y page 282).

Refueling

Fuel filler flapWhen you open or close the vehicle with theSmartKey, the fuel filler flap is automaticallyunlocked or locked.The fuel filler flap is located to the rear on theright. The position of the fuel filler cap is dis-played in the instrument cluster8. Thearrow next to the filling pump indicates theside of the vehicle.

: To open the fuel filler flap; Tire pressure table= Fuel type? To insert the fuel filler cap

Refueling 129

Drivingandparking

Z

OpeningX Switch off the engine.

i When the engine is running and the fuelfiller flap is open, the engine diagnosticswarning lamp; may light up.Further information can be found in the"Warning and indicator lamps in the instru-ment cluster" chapter (Y page 195).

X Open the driver's door. This switches theignition to position0, which corresponds tohaving removed the SmartKey. The driver’sdoor can be closed again.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap opens slightly.

X Open the fuel filler flap.X Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holderbracket on the inside of filler flap?.

X Completely insert the fuel pump nozzle intothe filler neck and refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

ClosingX Replace the fuel filler cap and turn it clock-wise. The fuel filler cap audibly engages.

X Close the fuel filler flap.

130 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

G Risk of explosion or fireThe fuel line or the fuel tank is defective.X Set the Start/Stop button to key position 0 immediately.X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap can-not be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey battery is discharged.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 68).orX Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 70).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-med.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.

In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! If the engine speed is too high or if thevehicle is rolling, do not shift the transmis-sion directly from D to R, from R to D ordirectly to P.Do not open the driver's door while thevehicle is in motion. At low speeds in trans-mission position D or R, park position P isotherwise engaged automatically.The transmission could be damaged.

! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.

Parking 131

Drivingandparking

Z

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P.Rthe SmartKey must be in position 0 in theignition lock and then removed from theignition lock, or the Start/Stop buttonmustbe pressed.Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the frontwheels must be turned towards the curb.Rthe empty vehicle must be secured at thefront axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.Ra laden vehicle must also be secured at therear axle with a wheel chock or similar, forexample, on uphill or downhill gradients.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the engine is switched off, the trans-mission shifts into neutral position N. Thevehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

! Do not open the driver's door while thevehicle is in motion. At low speeds in trans-mission position D or R, park position P isotherwise engaged automatically. This candamage the transmission.

i Observe the display messages in theinstrument cluster (Y page 162).

AMG SPEEDSHIFT DCT 7-speed sportstransmissionX Shift the transmission to P with the buttonin the center console.

Using the Start/Stop buttonX Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 119).The engine stops and all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster go out.

X Apply the electric parking brake.

i The engine can be turned off while thevehicle is in motion by pressing and holdingthe Start/Stop button for about three sec-onds.

i If you switch the engine off with the trans-mission in positionR orD, the transmissionautomatically shifts to N.If you move the E-SELECT lever toN beforeswitching off the engine, the transmissionremains inN for approximately 30minutes.If you open the driver's or front-passengerdoor during this period, the transmissionautomatically shifts to P.

Using the SmartKey! Do not remove the SmartKey while thevehicle is in motion. Otherwise, at lowspeeds, parking lock P will be activatedautomatically.Do not open the driver's door while thevehicle is in motion. At low speeds, trans-mission position P is engaged automati-cally.This could cause damage to the transmis-sion and the parking lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock and remove it.The parking lock is activated.

X Apply the electric parking brake.

i If you move the E-SELECT lever to Nbefore switching off the engine, the trans-mission remains in N for approximately30 minutes. If you open the driver's orfront-passenger door during this period,the transmission automatically shifts to P.

132 ParkingDrivingandparking

The transmission remains in N if:Rthe SmartKey is in the ignition lock andRyou use the E‑SELECT lever to shift thetransmission to N before switching theengine off

This still applies if you open the driver's orfront-passenger door.Further information on transmission posi-tion N when operating with a SmartKey isavailable in the "Car wash" section(Y page 223).

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The function of the electric parking brake isdependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-board voltage is low or there is a malfunctionin the system, it may not be possible to applythe released parking brake.X If this is the case, only park the vehicle onlevel ground and secure it to prevent it roll-ing away.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

It may not be possible to release an appliedparking brake, if the on-board voltage is lowor there is a malfunction in the system. Con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

Applying/releasing manuallyX To engage: push handle:.When the electric parking brake isengaged, the redF (USA only) or!(Canada only) indicator lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster.i The electric parking brake can also beapplied when the SmartKey is in position 0.

X Pull handle:.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter goes out.i The electric parking brake can only thenbe released when the ignition is switchedon using the Start/Stop button.

Releasing the electric parking brakeautomaticallyThe electric parking brake is released auto-matically when the following conditions aresimultaneously fulfilled:Rthe engine is runningRthe transmission is in position D or R.Rthe hood is closed.Ryour seat belt is fastened.Ryou accelerate.If the transmission is in position R, the trunklid must be closed.

Parking 133

Drivingandparking

Z

If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of P or you have pre-viously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).

i Ensure that you do not depress the accel-erator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise theparking brake will be released and the vehi-cle will start to move.

Emergency brakingThe vehicle can also be braked during anemergency by using the electric parkingbrake.X While driving, push handle:of the electricparking brake (Y page 133).

i The vehicle is braked as long as you keepthe handle of the electric parking brakepressed. The longer the electric parkingbrake handle is depressed, the greater thebraking force.

During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Release Parking BrakeRelease Parking Brake messageappearsRthe redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clus-ter appears.

When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-still, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehiclemay suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop andseek advice.

i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the coun-try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic-tions prohibit the driver from using a mobilephone while driving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-freemode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle coversa distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) persecond.

134 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to therecommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried outaccording to the service intervals listed inthe Maintenance Booklet or the serviceinterval display.

Fuel consumption also increases when driv-ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and inhilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance with

the manufacturer's specifications. For thisreason, all work on the enginemust be carriedout by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately.Drive on for a short while. This allows the air-flow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Driving tips 135

Drivingandparking

Z

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, theremay be a delayed reac-tion from the brakeswhen braking for the firsttime. Thismay also occur after the vehicle hasbeen washed or driven through deep water.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-tion to the traffic conditions. This will warmupthe brake discs, thereby drying them morequickly and protecting them against corro-sion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.RBrake occasionally to remove any possiblesalt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes

! If the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster and you hear awarn-ing tone while the engine is running, thebrake fluid level may be too low. Observeadditional warning messages in the multi-function display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immedi-ately. This work should be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

! As the ESP® system operates automati-cally, the engine and the ignition must beswitched off (the SmartKeymust be in posi-tion 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or the Start/Stop button must be in position 0 or 1) if:Rthe electric parking brake is tested usinga brake dynamometer.Rthe vehicle is towed with one axle raised.Braking triggered automatically by ESP®may seriously damage the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop. Have this work car-ried out at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.Have the brake pads replaced and the brakefluid renewed at a qualified specialist work-shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the function-ality of your brakes at regular intervals. At ahigh speed, brake firmly while paying atten-tion to the traffic conditions. This improvesthe grip of the brake pads.You can find a description of Brake Assist(BAS) on (Y page 55).Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyhave brake pads/linings installed on yourvehicle which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspondto an equivalent quality standard. Brakepads/linings which have not been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are notof an equivalent quality could affect your vehi-cle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse brake fluid that has been speciallyapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,or which corresponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake fluid which has not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich is not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.

136 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

AMG high-performance compositebrake systemThe AMG high-performance compound brakesystem and the AMG ceramic high-perform-ance compound brake system are designedfor high loads. This may lead to noise whenbraking. This will depend on:RSpeedRBraking forceREnvironmental conditions, such as temper-ature and humidity

The wear of individual components of thebrake system, such as the brake pads/liningsor brake discs, depends on the individual driv-ing style and operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state amileage that will be valid under all circum-stances. An aggressive driving style will leadto high wear. You can obtain further informa-tion about this from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after sev-eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-sate for this by applying greater force to thebrake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adaptyour driving and braking accordingly duringthis break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results in corre-spondingly high brake wear. Observe thebrake wear warning lamp in the instrumentcluster and note any brake status messagesin the multifunction display. Especially forhigh performance driving, it is important tomaintain and have the brake system checkedregularly.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads

! Do not drive through flooded areas.Check the depth of anywater before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electronic compo-nents in the engine or the automatic trans-mission. Water can also be drawn in by theengine's air suction nozzles and this cancause engine damage.

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle

Driving tips 137

Drivingandparking

Z

becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

At the onset of winter, have your vehicle win-terized at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand braking maneuvers. Do not use cruisecontrol.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freez-ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Youshould pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around thefreezing point.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 253).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 252).Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 252).

Driving systems

Cruise control

Important safety notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed.On long and steep downhill gradients, espe-cially if the vehicle is laden, you must selectshift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time(Y page 127). By doing so, you will make useof the braking effect of the engine. Thisrelieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating andwearing too quickly.If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of an acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruisecontrol cannot take into account the road,traffic and weather conditions. Cruise controlis only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canset any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drivewheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

138 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Cruise control lever

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

= To deactivate cruise control? To store the current speed or call up the

last stored speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the lower section of themultifunction display.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedYou can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up:or down; to the pressure point.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumedwhen the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling upthe last stored speed

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever to the pres-sure point, up: for a higher speed ordown; for a lower speed.

X Keep the cruise control lever pressed untilthe desired speed is reached.

X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is stored.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. For exam-ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speedto the last speed stored after you have fin-ished overtaking.

Driving systems 139

Drivingandparking

Z

Making adjustments in 1 mph incre-mentsX Briefly press the cruise control lever to thepressure point, up: for a higher speed ordown; for a lower speed.The last speed stored is increased orreduced.

Making adjustments in 10 mph incre-mentsX Briefly press the cruise control leverbeyond the pressure point, up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.The last speed stored is increased orreduced.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards=.

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou press the electric parking brake han-dle.Ryou are driving below 20 mph (30 km/h).RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou shift the transmission to N while thevehicle is in motion.

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. The "Cruise Control OffCruise Control Off"message is displayed in themultifunction dis-play for approximately five seconds.

i The last speed stored is cleared when youswitch off the engine.

AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-tem

General notesThe electronically controlled damping systemworks continuously. This improves drivingsafety and ride comfort.The damping is tuned individually to eachwheel and depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection of Sport, Sport +or Comfort

If you select Comfort or Sport + mode andrestart the engine, the mode reverts to Sport.

i GTmodel: you can only choose betweenSport and Sport + modes. If you selectSport + mode and restart the engine, themode reverts to Sport.

Sport modeThe firmer suspension tuning in Sport modeensures even better contact with the road.Select this mode when employing a sportydriving style, e.g. on winding country roads.X Press button: once.Indicator lamp? lights up. You haveselected Sport mode.The AMG Ride Control SPORTAMG Ride Control SPORT messageappears in the multifunction display.

i GT model: Sport mode is the standardsetting. Indicator lamp? cannot beswitched off.

140 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Sport + modeThe very firm setting of the suspension tuningin Sport + mode ensures the best possiblecontact with the road. Select this mode onlywhen driving on race circuits.If indicator lamps= and? are off:X Press button: twice.Indicator lamps= and? light up. Youhave selected Sport + mode.The AMGAMG RideRide ControlControl SPORT +SPORT +messageappears in the multifunction display.

If indicator lamp? lights up:X Press button: once.Second indicator lamp= lights up. Youhave selected Sport + mode.The AMGAMG RideRide ControlControl SPORT +SPORT +messageappears in the multifunction display.

Comfort mode

i GT model: Comfort mode is unavailable.In comfort mode, the driving characteristicsof your vehicle are more comfortable. Selectthis mode if you favor a more comfortabledriving style, but also when driving fast onstraight roads, e.g. freeways.X Press button: repeatedly until indicatorlamps= and? go out.You have selected Comfort mode.The AMG Ride Control COMFORTAMG Ride Control COMFORT mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

Storing and calling up settingsOnce the suspension tuning and drive pro-gram have been selected, you can store andcall up your settings using AMG button;.X To store: press AMG button; until youhear a tone.

X To call up: press AMG button;.The stored suspension tuning and driveprogram are selected.

X To display: briefly press AMG button;.Your selection appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediatesurroundings. You are always responsible forsafe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park-ing space. When maneuvering, parking orpulling out of a parking space, make sure thatthere are no persons, animals or objects inthe area in which you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.The sensorsmay not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONICmay not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRRelease the electric parking brake.PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.PARKTRONIC monitors the area around yourvehicle using four sensors in the front bumperand four sensors in the rear bumper.

Driving systems 141

Drivingandparking

Z

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-handside (example)

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-sideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-mals or objectsRabove the detection range, e.g. overhang-ing loads, truck overhangs or loadingramps.

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. They can otherwise not function cor-rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 228).

Example: side view (Coupe)

Example: top view (Coupe)

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 12 in (approx.30 cm)

Corners Approx. 12 in (approx.30 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and a warn-ing tone sounds. If the distance falls belowthe minimum, the distance may no longer beshown.

Warning displaysThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area is in therear compartment on the parcel shelf.

142 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Warning display for the front area: Left-hand side of the vehicle; Right-hand side of the vehicle= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning display for each side of the vehi-cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellowsegments showing operational readiness=light up.The selector lever position determines whichwarning display is active while the engine isrunning:

Transmissionposition

Warning display

D Front area activated

R or N Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear anintermittent warning tone for approx-imately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two sec-onds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONICIf indicator lamp: lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you switch on the ignition and releasethe electric parking brake.

Driving systems 143

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after approx-imately 20 seconds,and the indicator lampin the PARKTRONICbutton lights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after approx-imately 20 seconds.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 228).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Rear view camera

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your imme-diate surroundings. You are always responsi-ble for safe maneuvering and parking. Whenmaneuvering or parking,make sure that thereare no persons, animals or objects in the areain which you are maneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will functionin a limited manner:Rif the trunk lid is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)

Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedRif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of therear view camera may be restricted due toadditional accessories on the rear of the vehi-cle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).

General notesRear view camera: is an optical parking aid.It shows the area behind your vehicle in theCOMAND display.

144 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

View through the cameraThe area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bot-tom-most guideline.

The rear view camera may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. The rear view camera does not showobjects in the following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgatehandle

Activating the rear view cameraX Ensure that key position 2 has beenselected with the Start/Stop button.

X Make sure that the "rear view camera"function is selected in COMAND (see the

separate operating instructions forCOMAND).

X Engage reverse gear.The COMAND display shows the areabehind the vehicle.

You can also switch off the display of the areabehind the vehicle in the COMAND display.

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor the areas on both sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in the moni-tored area. If you then switch on the corre-sponding turn signal to change lanes, you willalso receive a visual and audible collisionwarning. For this purpose, Blind Spot Assistuses sensors in the rear bumper.

Important safety notesBlind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving.

G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tampering

Driving systems 145

Drivingandparking

Z

with, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Monitoring range of the sensorsIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover-ing the sensorsRthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavyrain or snowRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbike or bicycleRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanesRyou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or similar lane bordersVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

Example (Roadster)

Blind Spot Assistmonitors the area up to 10 ft(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next toyour vehicle, as shown in the diagram.

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in themiddle of their lane. This may bethe case if the vehicles are driving on the innerside of their lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane borders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside particularly long vehicles, e.g.trucks, for a prolonged time.

The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist areintegrated into the sides of the rear bumper.Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, iceor slush in the vicinity of the sensors. Theradar sensors must not be covered, e.g. byoverhanging loads. Following a severe impactor in the event of damage to the bumpers,have the function of the radar sensorschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not workproperly.

Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampWhen Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights up yel-low up to a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h). Atspeeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indica-tor lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist isoperational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph

146 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the corre-sponding side lights up red. This warning isalways given when a vehicle enters the blindspot monitoring range from behind or fromthe side. When you overtake a vehicle, thewarning only occurs if the difference in speedis less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, vehicles detectedare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp:. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist(Y page 157) is activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Ensure that key position 2 has beenselected with the Start/Stop button.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately 1.5 secondsand then turn yellow.

Driving systems 147

Drivingandparking

Z

148

Useful information ............................ 150Important safety notes .................... 150Displays and operation .................... 150Menus and submenus ...................... 152Display messages ............................. 162Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 190

149

On-board

computerand

displays

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 23).

Important safety notes

You will find an illustration of the instrumentcluster in the "At a glance" section(Y page 27).

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.

The on-board computer only showsmessagesor warnings from certain systems in the mul-tifunction display. You should therefore makesure your vehicle is operating safely at alltimes. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not oper-ating safely may cause an accident.

Displays and operation

Engine oil temperature displayThe engine oil temperature gauge is in theinstrument cluster on the right-hand side.Under normal operating conditions, the tem-perature may rise to 140 †.The transmission fluid temperature and thecoolant temperature are displayed in theAMG menu (Y page 160).

TachometerThe red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.

! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.The outside temperature display is in themul-tifunction display (Y page 152).Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.

150 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Operating the on-board computer

: Multifunction display; Switches on the Voice Control System;

see the separate operating instructions= Right control panel? Left control panelA Back buttonX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the AudioAudio menu: selects astored station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the AudioAudio menu: selects theprevious/next station or selectsan audio track or a video sceneusing rapid scrollingRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:starts rapid scrolling through thephone book

a RConfirms a selection/displaymessageRIn the TelTel (Telephone) menu:switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumberRIn the AudioAudio menu: stops thestation search function at thedesired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redial mem-ory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

Displays and operation 151

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Back button

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice ControlSystem; see the separate oper-ating instructionsRHides display messages/callsup the last TripTrip menu functionusedRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display inthe TripTrip menu

Multifunction displayValues and settings as well as display mes-sages are shown in the multifunction display.

: Selector lever position/shift range anddrive program

; Text field= Menu bar? Status line with time and outside temper-

atureX To show menu bar=: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress the= or; button on the steer-ing wheel to call up the menu bar and select amenu.

Operating the on-board computer(Y page 151).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTripTrip menu (Y page 152)RNaviNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 153)RAudioAudio menu (Y page 154)RTelTel menu (telephone) (Y page 156)RDriveAssistDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 157)RServiceService menu (Y page 157)RSettingsSettings menu (Y page 157)RAMGAMG menu (Y page 160)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on thesteering wheel until the TripTrip menu withtrip odometer: and odometer; isshown.

Digital speedometerX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer.

: Digital speedometer

152 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"The values in the From StartFrom Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey whilstthe values in the From ResetFrom Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectFrom StartFrom Start or From ResetFrom Reset.

Example: trip computer "From Start": Distance; Time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionThe From StartFrom Start trip computer is automati-cally reset if:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.The From ResetFrom Reset trip computer is automati-cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or99,999 miles.

Calling up the rangeX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press9 or: to select approximaterange:.

Approximate range: is calculated accord-ing to the current driving style and the amountof fuel in the tank. If there is only half of thereserve fuel left in the fuel tank, then insteadof range:, the display shows a vehicle beingrefueledC.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. You can findfurther information in the separate COMANDoperating instructions.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the NaviNavi menu.

Route guidance not active

Example: direction of travel display: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction

Menus and submenus 153

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

= Current road? Symbol for "follow the road's course"

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Symbol for change of directionWhen a change of direction is announced, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distance indi-cator shortens towards the top of the displayas you approach the point of the announcedchange of direction.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendationLane recommendations are only displayed ifthe relevant data is available on the digitalmap.

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Lane recommendation? Symbol for change of directionOn multilane roads, the system can displaylane recommendation= for the next changeof direction. During the change of direction,additional lanes may be displayed.

Lane recommendation display (example): Uninterrupted lane; New lane during a change of direction= Lane recommended for the change of

directionYou can find further information on lane rec-ommendation in the separate COMAND oper-ating instructions.

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion systemRO: you have reached the destination.RNew Route...New Route... or Calculating RouteCalculating Route:calculating a new route.ROff MapOff Map or OffOff MappedMapped RoadRoad: the vehicleposition is outside the area of the digitalmap (off-map position).RNo RouteNo Route: no route could be calculated tothe selected destination.

You can find further information on statusindicators in the separate COMAND operat-ing instructions.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio stationYou can only change the waveband and storenew stations using COMAND.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

154 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

: Waveband; Station1

X To select a stored station: briefly pressthe9 or: button.

X To select a station from the station list:press and hold the9 or: button.

X To select a station using manual tuning(only when a station list is not received):press and hold9 or:.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.You can find further information on operat-ing the satellite radio in the separate oper-ating instructions.

Operating an audio player or audiomediaAudio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on the equip-ment installed in the vehicle.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

CD player display (example): Current titleX To select the next/previous track:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9

or: button until desired track has beenreached.

If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and name of the track.The current track does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).

Video DVD operationX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next or previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired scene hasbeen reached.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

1 If the station has been stored, the memory position will also be displayed.

Menus and submenus 155

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

When telephoning, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.Functions and displays are dependent on theoptional equipment installed in your vehicle.You can establish a Bluetooth® connection toCOMAND (see the separate operatinginstructions).X Switch on the mobile phone and COMAND.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.

You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPleasePlease EnterEnter PINPIN: the mobile phone hasbeen placed in the mobile phone bracketand the PIN has not been entered.

X Enter the PIN using the mobile phone,Voice Control System or COMAND.Themobile phonewill search for a network.In the meantime, the Phone No ServicePhone No Servicedisplay message appears in the multifunc-tion display.RPhone ReadyPhone Ready or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RPhone No ServicePhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searchingfor a network.

Accepting a callIf someone calls you when you are in the TelTelmenu, a display message appears in the mul-tifunction display, for example:

X Press the6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.

You can accept a call even if you are not in theTelTel menu.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steeringwheel.

You can end or reject a call even if you are notin the TelTel menu.Dialing an entry from the phone bookIf your mobile phone is able to receive calls,you can search for and dial a number from thephone book in COMAND at any time.X Copy the phone book from the mobilephone to COMAND.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the9,: ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Press the9 or: button to select thename you want.To scroll rapidly, press and hold the9or: button for longer than one second.After a short time, the rapid scroll speedsup.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is storedfor a name: press the6 ora buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select thephone number you want.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.

orX If you do not want to make a call: pressthe~ button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.

156 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to theredial memory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.

Assistance menu

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistYou can use the BlindBlind SpotSpot Asst.Asst. functionto activate or deactivate Blind Spot Assist(Y page 145).X Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

Maintenance menu

In the Serv.Serv. menu, you can:Rcall up display messages (Y page 164)Rcheck the tire pressure electronically(Y page 256)Rcall up the service due date (Y page 222)

Settings menu

Introduction

In the SettingsSettings menu you can:Rchange the instrument cluster settings(Y page 157)Rchange the light settings (Y page 158)Rchange the vehicle settings (Y page 159)Rchange the convenience settings(Y page 159)Rrestore the factory settings (Y page 160)

Instrument cluster

Selecting the unit ofmeasurement for dis-tanceThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function allows you to choose whether cer-tain displays appear in km/h or mph in themultifunction display.The selected units apply to:Rthe odometer and the trip odometerRthe trip computerRthe digital speedometer in the TripTrip menuRthe digital speedometer in the AMGAMG menuRthe navigation instructions in the NaviNavimenuRcruise controlX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theINST. CLUSTERINST. CLUSTER submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.

Menus and submenus 157

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-tion.You will see the selected setting: kmkm ormilesmiles .

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Permanent display for outside tempera-ture or additional speedometerThe Permanent Display: Outside Tem‐Permanent Display: Outside Tem‐perature/Speedometerperature/Speedometer allows you tochoose whether the multifunction displayshows the outside temperature or the speedat the bottom right. The unit used in the addi-tional speedometer depends on the displayunit set (Y page 157).X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInst. clusterInst. cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent DisplayPermanent Display function.You will see the selected setting Speedom‐Speedom‐eter [km/h]eter [km/h] or Speedometer [mph]Speedometer [mph] orOutside TemperatureOutside Temperature.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Lights

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offThis function is not available in Canada.If you have activated the Lights:Lights: functionand the light switch is in theà position,the daytime running lamps are switched onautomatically when the engine is running. If itis dark, the low-beam headlamps switch onautomatically.In the dark, the following also light up:Rthe low-beam headlampsRthe standing lampsRthe tail lampsRthe license plate lampRthe side marker lamps

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLIGHTSLIGHTS submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theLights:Lights: function.You will see the selected setting: EnabledEnabledor DisabledDisabled.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Setting the brightness for the display andswitchesYou can use the Brightness Display/Brightness Display/Switches:Switches: function to set the brightness ofthe multifunction display and the switches inthe vehicle.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLIGHTSLIGHTS submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBrightness Display/Switches:Brightness Display/Switches: func-tion.You see the selected setting LevelLevel with avalue of between 0 and 100.

X Press thea button to save the setting.X Press the: or9 button to increaseor decrease the brightness.

Activating/deactivating surround light-ing and exterior lighting delayed switch-offThe LocatorLocator Lighting:Lighting: function allows youto set whether the exterior lighting shouldcome on when it is dark:Rfor 40 seconds after unlocking the vehiclewith the key.The exterior lighting switches off if youopen the driver’s door.Rfor 15 seconds after switching off theengine and closing the doors.If the engine is switched off and no doorsare opened, or if an open door is not closed,

158 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

the exterior lighting goes out after60 seconds.

If you activate the LocatorLocator Lighting:Lighting: func-tion, the following light up:Rthe parking lampsRthe low-beam headlampsRthe license plate lampRthe surround lighting in the exterior mirrorsX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLIGHTSLIGHTS submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theLocator Lighting:Locator Lighting: function.You will see the selected setting: EnabledEnabledor DisabledDisabled.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Deactivating the delayed switch-off tempora-rily:X Select key position 0 with the Start/Stopbutton before leaving the vehicle.

X Select key position 2 and then key position0 again with the Start/Stop buttonThe delayed shut-off is deactivated.

The delayed shut-off is reactivated the nexttime you start the engine.

Activating/deactivating the interior light-ing delayed switch-offIf you select key position 0 with the Start/Stop button when the Light. delayLight. delay func-tion is activated, the interior lighting lights upfor approximately 20 seconds if it is dark.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightLight submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theLight. delayLight. delay function.You will see the selected setting: onon or offoff.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismIf you select the Automatic Door Lock:Automatic Door Lock:function, the vehicle is centrally locked abovea speed of around 9 mph(15 km/h).

i For further information on the automaticlocking feature, see (Y page 70).

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Press thea button to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAutomatic door locksAutomatic door locks function.You will see the selected setting: EnabledEnabledor DisabledDisabled.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Convenience

Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

You can use the EasyEasy Entry/Exit:Entry/Exit: functionto activate or deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 89).

Menus and submenus 159

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theEasy Entry/ExitEasy Entry/Exit function.You will see the selected setting: EnabledEnabledor DisabledDisabled.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-ing feature on/offIf you switch on the FoldFold MirrorsMirrors inin whenwhenLockingLocking function, the exterior mirrors fold inwhen you lock the vehicle. If you unlock thevehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold outagain.If you have switched the function on and youfold the exteriormirrors in using the button onthe door (Y page 91), they will not fold outautomatically. The exterior mirrors can thenonly be folded out using the button on thedoor.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theCONVENIENCECONVENIENCE submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theFold Mirrors in when LockingFold Mirrors in when Locking func-tion.You will see the selected setting: EnabledEnabledor DisabledDisabled.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Restoring the factory settingsFor safety reasons, the Lights:Lights: function inthe LIGHTSLIGHTS submenu is only reset if the vehi-cle is stationary.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory SettingsFactory Settings submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings?Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the: or9 button to selectYesYes or NoNo.

X Press thea button to confirm the selec-tion.If you have selected YesYes, the multifunctiondisplay shows a confirmation message.

AMG menu

AMG displaysX Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

: Digital speedometer; Engine oil temperature= Coolant temperature? Transmission fluid temperatureIf the engine oil temperature is below 80†orif the transmission fluid temperature is below60 †, the corresponding temperature gaugeflashes. Avoid driving at full engine outputduring this time.

SETUPSETUP displays the drive program, the AMGadaptive sport suspension system settingand the selected traction assist.

160 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly untilSETUP is displayed.

orX Vehicles without AMG PerformanceMedia: press the AMGbutton on the centerconsole.

: Drive program (C/S/S+/M); ESP®mode (ONON/SPORTSPORT handlinghandling modemode/

OFFOFF)= AMG adaptive sport suspension system

setting (COMFORTCOMFORT/SPORTSPORT/SPORT +SPORT +)RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMERYou can use the RACETIMER to store laptimes.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theRACETIMER is shown.

i If the RACETIMER is selected, the=and; buttons are inoperative.

: Digital speedometer; RACETIMER= Lap

You can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if key position 2 isselected with the Start/Stop button.X To start: start the RACETIMER witha.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the= or; button to selectInterm. TimeInterm. Time.

X Pressa to confirm.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.

Starting a new lapIt is possible to store a maximum of sixteenlaps.X Pressa to confirm New LapNew Lap.

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= Lap

Stopping the RACETIMERX Press the% button on the steeringwheel.

X Pressa to confirm YesYes.

Menus and submenus 161

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

If you stop the vehicle and select key position1with the Start/Stop button, the RACETIMERinterrupts timing. If you select key position 2or 3 with the Start/Stop button and thenpressa to select STARTSTART, timing is contin-ued.

Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press the= or; button to selectReset LapReset Lap.

X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all lapsIf you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER isreset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. Ifyou have stopped 16 laps, the current lapdoes not have to be reset.X Reset the current lap.X Pressa to confirm ResetReset.Reset Race TimerReset Race Timer appears in the multi-function display.

X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Overall statisticsThis function is shown if you have stored atleast one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation is shown.

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speed

Lap statisticsThis function is only available if you havestored at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until thelap evaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-bol:.

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lapX Press the9 or: button to select adifferent lap evaluation.

Display messages

General notesDisplaymessages appear in themultifunctiondisplay.

162 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages with graphic displays maybe shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may therefore differ from themultifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the dis-play messages and follow the additionalnotes in this Operator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompaniedby an audible warning tone or a continuoustone.When the ignition is switched off, all displaymessages are deleted, apart from some high-priority displaymessages. Once the causes ofthe high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display mes-sages are also deleted.When you stop and park the vehicle, pleaseobserve the notes on parking (Y page 131).

Display messages 163

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.The display message is cleared.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-play messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-sages have been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain display messages. You can call up the display messagesin themessage memory.X Press the= or; button on the steering wheel to select the ServiceService menu.If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages2 Messages, for example.

X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages2 Messages.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages.When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.

164 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Brakes

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)ABS and ESC Cur‐ABS and ESC Cur‐rentlyrently UnavailableUnavailableSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

ABS, ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.For example, the on-board voltagemay be insufficient. In addition,theh, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrumentcluster.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.

G WARNINGIf the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock during hard braking.This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and mayincrease the braking distance. If ABS is deactivated due to a mal-function, BAS and ESP® are also deactivated. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)ABSABS andand ESCESC Inoper‐Inoper‐ative See Opera‐ative See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are unavailable due to a mal-function. In addition, theh,å and!warning lamps lightup in the instrument cluster.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.

G WARNINGIf the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock during hard braking.This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and mayincrease the braking distance. If ABS is deactivated due to a mal-function, BAS and ESP® are also deactivated. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 165

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)EBR,EBR, ABS,ABS, ESCESC Inop‐Inop‐erative See Opera‐erative See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS and hillstart assist are not available due to a malfunction. In addition, theh, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrumentcluster and a warning tone sounds.The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.

G WARNINGIf EBD and ABS are malfunctioning, the rear wheels in particularcould lock under braking. If ABS is deactivated due to a malfunc-tion, BAS and ESP® are also deactivated. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Please ReleasePlease ReleaseParking BrakeParking Brake

! The indicator lamp (red) flashes and a warning tone sounds.You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake.orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

! The indicator lamp (red) flashes, the warning lamp (yellow)lights up and a warning tone sounds.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning and the braking effectis restricted.While the vehicle is in motion:X Release the electric parking brake handle.While the vehicle is stationary:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake.If the display message continues to be displayed:X Shift the transmission toPwith the button in the center console.X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

! The indicator lamp (red) flashes and a warning tone sounds.You are making an emergency stop using the electric parkingbrake.X After the emergency stop: release the electric parking brakelever.

166 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake SeeParking Brake SeeOper. ManualOper. Manual

! The warning lamp (yellow) lights up. Additionally the indica-tor lamp (red) lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Pull the electric parking brake handle.orX Pull away carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Pull the electric parking brake lever for at least ten seconds, untilthe display message disappears.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Shift the transmission toPwith the button in the center console.X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

! The indicator lamp (red) flashes.The power supply for the electric parking brake was interrupted.X Pull the electric parking brake handle.orX Pull away carefully.orX Pull the electric parking brake handle until the display messagedisappears.

! The indicator lamp (red) flashes and the warning lamp (yel-low) lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.orX Pull away carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 167

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

! Thewarning lamp (yellow) lights up. In addition, the indicatorlamp (red) flashes for about 10 seconds after the electric parkingbrake has been engaged or released. It then goes out or remainslit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over-voltage or undervoltage.X Pull away carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If there is overvoltage or undervoltage:X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. bycharging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Switch the ignition off and on, and then engage or release theelectric parking brake.

If this does not release the electric parking brake:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

! Thewarning lamp (yellow) lights up. In addition, the indicatorlamp (red) flashes for about 10 seconds after the electric parkingbrake has been engaged or released. It then goes out or remainslit.The electric parking brake has overheated.X Allow the vehicle to cool down. Do not engage or release theelectric parking brake during this time.

X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it.X When the vehicle has cooled down: switch the ignition off and onagain, then engage or release the electric parking brake.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)ParkingParking BrakeBrake Inop‐Inop‐erativeerative

! Thewarning lamp (yellow) lights up. In addition, the indicatorlamp (red) flashes for about 10 seconds after the electric parkingbrake has been engaged or released. It then goes out or remainslit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.X Switch the ignition off and on, and then engage the electricparking brake.

If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake:X Shift the transmission toPwith the button in the center console.X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

168 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On the Igni‐Turn On the Igni‐tion to Releasetion to Releasethe Parking Brakethe Parking Brake

! The indicator lamp (red) flashes.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni-tion was switched off.X Switch on the ignition.

F(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidCheck Brake FluidLevelLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. Inaddition, theJ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lightsup and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGDriving with the message Check Brake Fluid LevelCheck Brake Fluid Level displayedcan result in an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake PadCheck Brake PadWearWear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 169

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

÷ESC InoperativeESC InoperativeSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunc-tion. In addition, theh and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.

G WARNING

If ESP® andBASare deactivated, the danger of skidding and havingan accident increases.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

÷ESC CurrentlyESC CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ESP®, BAS and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. Theself-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. Thebrake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. In addition, theh and å warninglamps light up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING

If ESP® andBASare deactivated, the danger of skidding and havingan accident increases.X Carefully drive a short distance making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h) until the displaymessage disappears.

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag EnabledAirbag EnabledSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag areenabled during the journey, even though:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys-tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seatRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe system may detect objects or forces applying additionalweight on the seat.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bagmay be triggered unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Apply the parking brake.X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

170 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsX Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight andinterpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actuallyis.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

Observe the 45(Y page 42) indicator lamp and the multi-function display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe 45 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. If theindicator lamp is on, OCS (Y page 42) has disabled the front-passenger air bag.Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐ator's Manualator's Manual display messages must not be shown in themultifunction display. Wait for a period of at least 60 secondsuntil the necessary system checks have been completed. This isnecessary to make sure that the display messages do notappear in the multifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the 45 indicator lamp remains litor goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 42).

Display messages 171

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag DisabledAirbag DisabledSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag aredeactivated during the journey, although:Ran adultorRa person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-passenger seat

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter-pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bagmay not be triggered in the event of an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Apply the parking brake.X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

Observe the 45(Y page 42) indicator lamp and the multi-function display and check the following:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe 45 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. If theindicator lamp is on, OCS (Y page 42) has disabled the front-passenger air bag.Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐ator's Manualator's Manual display messages must not be shown in themultifunction display. Wait for a period of at least 60 secondsuntil the necessary system checks have been completed. This isnecessary and ensures that the displaymessages do not appearin the multifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the 45 indicator lamp remains litor goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

172 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

GTele Aid Inopera‐Tele Aid Inopera‐tivetive

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunc-tioning.X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

6SRS MalfunctionSRS MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-ter.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.For further information about SRS, see (Y page 37).

6FrontFront LeftLeft SRSSRS Mal‐Mal‐function Servicefunction ServiceRequiredRequiredorFront Right SRSFront Right SRSMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGIf SRS is malfunctioning, individual systems may be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered in the event of an acci-dent with a high rate of vehicle deceleration. In this condition, therestraint system provides only restricted protection.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:The display message will only appear if all or a number of LEDs have failed.

Display messages 173

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheckCheck LeftLeft LowLow BeamBeamorCheck Right LowCheck Right LowBeamBeam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp does not light up. Inaddition, the high-beam headlamp is also inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAUTOAUTO LampLamp FunctionFunctionInoperativeInoperative

The light sensor is defective.USA only:X Switch off the daytime running lamps in the on-board computer(Y page 158).

X Switch the lights on and off using the light switch.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftTurn SignalTurn SignalorCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The LEDs in the rear left or right-hand indicator lamp do not lightup.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left MirrorCheck Left MirrorTurn SignalTurn SignalorCheckCheck RightRight MirrorMirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal

None of the LEDs in the left or right-hand exterior mirrors light up.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftTurn SignalTurn SignalorCheck Front RightCheck Front RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The LEDs in the front left or right-hand indicator lamp do not lightup.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck CenterCenter BrakeBrakeLampLamp

None of the LEDs in the high-mounted brake lamp light up.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

174 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Left BrakeCheck Left BrakeLampLamporCheck Right BrakeCheck Right BrakeLampLamp

The left or right-hand brake light LEDs do not light up.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left TailLampLamporCheck Right TailCheck Right TailLampLamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp LEDs do not light up.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left HighCheck Left HighBeamBeamorCheck Right HighCheck Right HighBeamBeam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp does not light up.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft LicenseLicensePlate LampPlate LamporCheck RightCheck RightLicense Plate LampLicense Plate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp does not light up.X Replace the bulb (Y page 101).

bBackup LightBackup Light

None of the LEDs in the backup lamp light up.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft DaytimeDaytimeRunning LightRunning LightorCheck Right Day‐Check Right Day‐time Running Lighttime Running Light

The LEDs in the left or right-hand daytime running lamp do not lightup. As a result, the corresponding side/standing lamp has failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 175

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker LamporCheck Front RightCheck Front RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker LamporCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftParking LampParking LamporCheck Front RightCheck Front RightParking LampParking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off LightsSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch toÃ.

bMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

176 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

?Coolant Low StopCoolant Low StopVehicle TurnVehicle TurnEngine OffEngine Off

The coolant is too hot. In addition, the? warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not blocked, e.g.by snow, slush or ice.

X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting theengine. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the coolant temperature increases again, visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop immediately.

! If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡ (120 †), do not con-tinue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun-tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Display messages 177

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

# The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131).X Open the hood.X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

+Check CoolantCheck CoolantLevel See Opera‐Level See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 221).

X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

4Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil Levellow Stop Vehiclelow Stop VehicleTurn Engine OffTurn Engine Off

There is insufficient oil in the engine. There is a risk of enginedamage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Top up and check the engine oil level (Y page 219).

178 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilLevelLevel (Add 1(Add 1 Liter)Liter)

The oil level is too low.X Check the oil level (Y page 219).X If necessary, add engine oil.X Have the engine checked for leaks if you need to add engine oilmore often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

4Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil LevelToo HighToo High

You have added too much engine oil. The engine or catalytic con-verter may be damaged.X Siphon off excess engine oil until it is at the specified level.Observe the legal requirements.

4Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil LevelCannot Be MeasuredCannot Be Measured

The measuring system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4Engine Oil Pres‐Engine Oil Pres‐sure Control Seesure Control SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The oil pressure sensor has reported a malfunction.The oil pressure control is in emergency mode.The engine lubrication is guaranteed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4Engine Oil Pres‐Engine Oil Pres‐sure Stop Vehiclesure Stop VehicleTurn Engine OffTurn Engine Off

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Check the engine oil level (Y page 219) and top up if necessary.X If there are visible signs of oil loss from the vehicle, consult aqualified specialist workshop.

C There is only a small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8Fuel Level LowFuel Level Low

The fuel level has fallen below the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

Display messages 179

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

8Gas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¸Replace Air FilterReplace Air Filter

The air filter is dirty and must be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Cruise ControlCruise ControlInoperativeInoperative

Cruise control is defective.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise ControlCruise Control- - - mph- - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.X Activate ESP®(Y page 56).X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) andstore the speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 138).

180 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistInoperativeInoperative

Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistCurrently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative if:Rthe sensors are dirty.Rits function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.Blind Spot Assist is operational again and the display messagedisappears if:Rthe dirt (e.g. slush) drops away while the vehicle is in motion.Rthe system detects that the sensors are fully available again.Rthe radar sensor system is back within the operating tempera-ture range.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Clean the sensors (Y page 228).X Restart the engine.

Display messages 181

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

RectifyRectifyTire PressureTire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 256).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 259).

CheckCheckTiresTires

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 235).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 256).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

182 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

TireTire Press.Press. WarningWarningCaution Tire Mal‐Caution Tire Mal‐functionfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 235).

TireTire Press.Press. MonitorMonitorCurrently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐ableable

Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be receivedfrom the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarilymalfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been solved.

Tire Press.Tire Press.Sensor(s)MissingSensor(s)Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Mon‐Tire Pressure Mon‐itoritorInoperative NoInoperative NoWheel SensorsWheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.

Tire Pressure Mon‐Tire Pressure Mon‐itoritorInoperativeInoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 183

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

N The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.

L The hood is open.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Close the hood.

´(Coupe only)

C(Roadsteronly)

At least one door is open.X Close the doors.

KConvertible TopConvertible TopOperationOperation PossiblePossibleto 31 mphto 31 mph

If you drive at speeds of more than 31 mph (50 km/h), you cannotopen or close the soft top.X Fully open or close the soft top (Y page 79).

KConvertible TopConvertible TopOpening/ClosingOpening/ClosingNot FinishedNot Finished

The soft top is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics are dep-ressurized.X Fully open or close the soft top (Y page 79).

KOpen/Close Conver‐Open/Close Conver‐tible Top Com‐tible Top Com‐pletelypletely

The roof is not locked. If you drive at speeds of more than 31 mph(50 km/h), you cannot open or close the soft top.X If you are driving at speeds of more than 31 mph (50 km/h),reduce your speed.

X Push or pull the soft-top switch (Y page 79) until the soft top isfully open or closed.

KConvertibleConvertible TopTop ininOperation PleaseOperation PleaseWaitWait

The on-board voltage is too low.X Start the engine.

184 Display messagesOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The soft top has been opened and closed several times in a row.The soft-top drive has been switched off automatically for safetyreasons.You can open and close the soft top again after approximately tenminutes.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 79).

KDepress Brake toDepress Brake toStart EngineStart Engine

You have attempted to close the soft top with the soft top switchwhile the vehicle was stationary.X Depress the brake pedal.X Press the soft-top switch until the soft top is completely closed.

¥Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 221).

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+Change Key BatteryChange Key Battery

The SmartKey batteries are discharged.X Change the batteries (Y page 65).

+Key Not DetectedKey Not Detected(red display message)

The SmartKey is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds.When you switch off the engine, you will be unable to restart it.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Locate the SmartKey.

The key is not detected while driving because a powerful radiotransmitter is causing interference. A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition (Y page 119).

Display messages 185

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+Key Not DetectedKey Not Detected(white display mes-sage)

You are in the vehicle and the key currently cannot be detected bythe vehicle.X Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle.

If the SmartKey still cannot be detected:X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition (Y page 119).

+Obtain a New KeyObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

+Key Does NotKey Does NotBelong to VehicleBelong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

+Close Doors toClose Doors toLock VehicleLock Vehicle

At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.

+RemoveRemove 'Start''Start' But‐But‐ton and Insert Keyton and Insert Key

The KEYLESS-GO start function is temporarily malfunctioning or isdefective. A warning tone also sounds.X Insert the key into the ignition lock and turn it to the desiredposition (Y page 119).

+TakeTake YourYour KeyKey fromfromIgnitionIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

Transmission

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Apply BrakeApply Braketo Shift from 'P'to Shift from 'P'

You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever toposition D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

Apply BrakeApply Brakeand Start Engineand Start Engineto Disengage 'P'to Disengage 'P'

When the engine is switched off, it is not possible to shift out ofpark position P.X Depress the brake pedal and start the engine.

Start EngineStart Engineto Engage Gearto Engage Gear

The gear cannot be engaged when the engine is switched off.X Depress the brake pedal and start the engine.

186 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Depress BrakeDepress Braketo Start Engineto Start Engine

You cannot start the engine. The engine was switched off in posi-tion D or R.X Depress the brake pedal and start the engine.

Door OpenDoor OpenNot in 'P'Not in 'P'

The driver's door is open and the transmission is in positionR,N orD.A warning tone also sounds.X Shift the transmission toPwith the button in the center console.X Press the electric parking brake handle.

Service RequiredService RequiredDoDo NotNot ShiftShift GearsGearsVisit DealerVisit Dealer

You cannot change gear due to a malfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Do not switch off the engine.X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting thetransmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Make sure that the electric parking brake is applied.X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it(Y page 271).

X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

If no transmission position and no drive program is displayed:X Make sure that the electric parking brake is applied.X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it(Y page 271).

X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Only Shift to 'P'Only Shift to 'P'when Vehicle iswhen Vehicle isStationaryStationary

The vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the transmission toPwith the button in the center console.

ReversingReversing NotNot Poss.Poss.Service RequiredService Required

The sub geartrain with the even gears has failed. You can no longerengage reverse gear. The smoothness of the gear change isrestricted. The transmission is in emergency mode.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 187

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

jParking Lock Mal‐Parking Lock Mal‐funct. Apply Park‐funct. Apply Park‐ing Brakeing Brake

Transmission position P cannot be selected.X Make sure that the electric parking brake is applied.X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it(Y page 271).

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Have the vehicle trans-ported on a recovery vehicle or towed with the rear axle raised(Y page 244).

dStop Engage PStop Engage P

The transmission is faulty. The vehicle loses drive and rolls to astandstill.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Make sure that the electric parking brake is applied.X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it(Y page 271).

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

dTransmission OilTransmission OilCooling Malfunc‐Cooling Malfunc‐tiontion

The transmission coolant pump is faulty. The transmission mayoverheat.X In the on-board computer, select the AMGAMG menu and check thetransmission oil temperature.

X Avoid excessive loading, e.g. due to dynamic driving.X If the transmission oil temperature is less than 248 ‡(120 †),you can continue driving to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop.

dTrans. Oil Over‐Trans. Oil Over‐heated Drive onheated Drive onwith Carewith Care

The transmission oil has overheated.Manual drive programM and shift range restriction are no longeravailable. Only drive program C is still available. The engine outputis reduced according to the degree of overheating.X Allow the transmission oil to cool by adopting a defensive drivingstyle.

188 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Rear spoiler

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÑRear SpoilerRear SpoilerControl SystemControl SystemInoperativeInoperative

The rear spoiler cannot be fully retracted and may extend again.If the retraction of the rear spoiler is blocked, e.g. by ice:X Make sure that the cause of the block is eliminated.X Switch off the engine and lock the vehicle.X Start the vehicle after waiting a few minutes.The rear spoiler returns to the original position.

If this problem persists or the cause cannot be identified:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÑRearRear SpoilerSpoiler Inop‐Inop‐erative Limiterative Limit200 km/h200 km/h

The rear spoiler cannot be fully extended and extends as far aspossible.The speed of the vehicle is limited to 125 mph (200 km/h).If the extension/retraction of the rear spoiler is blocked, e.g. byice:X Make sure that the cause of the block is eliminated.X Switch off the engine and lock the vehicle.X Start the vehicle after waiting a few minutes.The rear spoiler returns to the original position.

If this problem persists or the cause cannot be identified:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 189

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Braking

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$(USAonly)J(Can-adaonly)

The red brakesystem warninglamp comes onwhile theengine is run-ning. A warningtone alsosounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the mal-function.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

F(USAonly)!(Can-adaonly)

The indicatorlamp for theelectric parkingbrake flashesand/or the yel-low warninglamp for theelectric parkingbrake lights up.

The electric parking brake is temporarily malfunctioning or defec-tive.

G WARNINGIn this condition, the vehicle is only of limited roadworthiness. Thiscan lead to an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

190 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

7 After startingthe engine, thered seat beltwarning lamplights up for6 seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).

7 After startingthe engine, thered seat beltwarning lamplights up. Inaddition, a warn-ing tone soundsfor up to6 seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).The warning tone ceases.

7 The red seat beltwarning lamplights up afterthe enginestarts, as soonas the driver'sdoor or thefront-passengerdoor is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.

7 The red seat beltwarning lampflashes and anintermittentaudible warningsounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Thevehicle is being driven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has brieflybeen driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 49).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warningceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent audible warningceases.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 191

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

! The yellow ABSwarning lamp islit while theengine is run-ning.

ABS has been deactivated due to amalfunction. ESP®, BAS and hillstart assist are therefore also deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the transmission, willnot be available.

hå!

The yellow ESP®and ESP® OFFwarning lampsand the yellowABS warninglamp are lit whilethe engine isrunning.

ABS and ESP® aremalfunctioning. Other systems, e.g. BAS and hillstart assist, are unavailable due to a malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 170).

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

192 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

h The yellow ESP®warning lampflashes while thevehicle is inmotion.

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control is switched off.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 56).

M The yellowSPORT handlingmode warninglamp is lit whilethe engine isrunning.

SPORT handling mode is activated.

G WARNING

ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle in extreme situations. ESP® inter-vention may not be able to provide enough assistance in suchsituations, and the vehicle may start to skid.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with theconditions written in the "Activating/deactivating SPORT han-dling mode" section (Y page 56).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 193

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

hå

The yellow ESP®and ESP® OFFwarning lampsare lit while theengine is run-ning.

ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6 The red SRSwarning lamp islit while theengine is run-ning.

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem).

G WARNINGIf the air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices are either trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, not triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Drive on carefully.X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

For further information about SRS, see (Y page 37).

194 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

; The yellowCheck Enginewarning lamplights up whilethe engine isrunning.

There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the enginemay bein emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In some states, you must visit a qualified specialist workshopas soon as the yellow check engine warning lamp lights up. Thisis due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If indoubt, checkwhether such legal regulations apply in the state inwhich you are currently driving.

; The yellowCheck Enginewarning lamplights up whilethe engine isrunning. Thesmoothness ofthe gear changeis restricted.

The sub geartrain with the odd gears has failed. The transmissionis in emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

ç The red engineoil temperaturewarning lampcomes on whilethe engine isrunning. A warn-ing tone alsosounds.

The engine oil temperature has exceeded 284 ‡ (140 †).The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Allow the engine to cool down.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 195

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ç The red engineoil temperaturewarning lampcomes on whilethe engine isrunning. Theengine oil tem-perature is notdisplayed.

The engine control unit data transfer is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

7 The yellowreserve fuelwarning lamplights up whilethe engine isrunning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

7 The yellowreserve fuelwarning lampflashes while theengine is run-ning.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel fillercap.

X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist work-shop.

196 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

h The yellow tirepressure moni-tor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) islit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in atleast one of the tires.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 131).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 235).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 256).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) flashes forapproximately oneminute and thenremains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tirepressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 197

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

198

Useful information ............................ 200Stowage areas .................................. 200Features ............................................. 202

199

Stow

ageandfeatures

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 23).

Stowage areas

Stowage space

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage compartments, parcelnets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.

Glove box

X Toopen: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwardsuntil it engages.

The glove box can be locked and unlockedusing the mechanical key, e.g. when leavingyour vehicle at a workshop.

X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° clockwise to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key intothe lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwiseto position1.

i Roadster: the glove box can be lockedand unlocked centrally using the SmartKey(Y page 62).

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment,you will find an AUX IN jack or a MediaInterface installed in the glove box. AMediaInterface is a universal interface for porta-ble audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or

200 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

USB device (see the separate COMANDoperating instructions).

i There is a 12 V power socket located inthe glove box.

Stowage compartment in the centerconsole

X To open: press down at the middle of themarking on lid:.

X To close: fold down cover:.

i Depending on the equipment installed,your vehicle is equipped with an ashtray ora stowage compartment.

Stowage compartment under the arm-rest

X To open: press button: on the left or rightand slide the armrest in the direction of thearrow.The armrest engages in two differentdetents.

i Roadster: the stowage compartment canbe locked and unlocked centrally using theSmartKey (Y page 62).

Stowage compartment in the rearcenter console

X Press button:.The stowage compartment opens.

i In the stowage compartment, you will findthe ignition lock (Y page 119) and the trunklid emergency release (Y page 74).

Stowage space on the rear wallbetween the seats

: Ruffled pocket

Stowage netsThere is a parcel net located in the front-passenger footwell.

Stowage areas 201

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.

Cup holder in the center console

Example: CoupeX Open the armrest (Y page 201).Cup holders: are under the armrest.

Sun visors

Overview of sun visors

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

Example: Coupe: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining strip, e.g. for a parking lot ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visoris clipped into bracket; andmirror coverAhas been folded up.

Glare from the side

Example: CoupeX Fold down the sun visor.X Pull the sun visor out of bracket;.X Swing the sun visor to the side.X Slide the sun visor horizontally as desired.

202 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Ashtrayi You can remove the ashtray insert anduse the resulting compartment for stow-age.

! The stowage space under the ashtray isnot heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga-rettes in the ashtray, make sure that theashtray is properly engaged.Otherwise, thestowage space could be damaged.

Example: CoupeX To open: briefly press the middle ofcover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X To remove the insert: slide insert; for-wards in the direction of the arrow.

X Remove insert;.X To re-install the insert: place insert;into the holder and press it in the oppositedirection of the arrow until it engages.

X To close: fold down cover:.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.

Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Example: CoupeX Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 119).

X To open: briefly press the middle ofcover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter; will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: fold down cover:.

12 V sockets

Points to observe before useX Select SmartKey position 1(Y page 119)using the Start/Stop button.

The sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum current draw of 180 W (15 A)each, e.g. bulbs or chargers for mobilephones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.

i You can also use the sockets when theignition is switched off. An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage doesnot drop too low. If the on-board voltage istoo low, the power to the sockets is auto-

Features 203

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

matically cut. This ensures that there is suf-ficient power to start the vehicle.

Socket in the glove box

X Open the glove box (Y page 200).Lift up the cover of socket:.

Socket on the center console

! If accessories are connected, make surethat a maximum current draw of 15 A is notexceeded. Otherwise, you will overload thefuse.

Example: CoupeX To open: briefly press the middle ofcover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.X To close: fold down cover:.

mbrace2

General notesYou must have a license agreement to acti-vate the mbrace service. Ensure that yoursystem is activated and ready for use, andpress theïMB Info call button to register.If one of these steps is not carried out, it maynot be possible to activate the system.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Shortly after successfully registering with thembrace service, a user ID and password willbe sent to you by mail.USA only: you can use this password to logonto the mbrace area under "Owners Online"at http://www.mbusa.com.The mbrace system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe correspondingmobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer CenterRa service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle ona map is only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded tothe Customer Assistance Center.

2 The System is called TELEAID in Canada.

204 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during an mbrace call,proceed as follows:X Press theW orX button on the mul-tifunction steering wheel.

orX Use the volume controller of COMAND.The mbrace system provides various serv-ices, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callUSA only: you can find information and adescription of all available features under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Self-diagnosis of the systemAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has beendetected if one of the following conditionsoccurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button doesnot come on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diag-nosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of thefollowing buttons continues to light up redafter the system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRthe TeleTele AidAid InoperativeInoperative or TeleTele AidAidNot ActivatedNot Activated message appears in themultifunction display after the system self-diagnosis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the system may not operate as

expected. In the event of an emergency, helpwill have to be summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Emergency call

Important safety notes! You must have a license agreement toactivate the mbrace service. Ensure thatyour system is activated and ready for use,and press the ï MB Info call button toregister. If one of these steps is not carriedout, it may not be possible to activate thesystem.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

General notesAnemergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered.

i You cannot end an automatically trig-gered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been ini-tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting CallConnecting Call messageappears in the multifunction display.The audio output is muted.

Features 205

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Once the connection has been made, theCall ConnectedCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.All important information on the emergency istransmitted, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicle (as deter-mined by the GPS system)RVehicle identification numberRInformation on the type of emergencyShortly after the emergency call has been ini-tiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center and the vehicleoccupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter attempts to get more informationon the emergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

The mbrace system cannot initiate an emer-gency call if a voice connection cannot beestablished with the Response Center. Thiscan occur for instance if the relevant mobilephone network is not available. The indicatorlamp in the SOS button flashes continuously.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display for approximately tenseconds.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency callG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button;flashes until the emergency call is con-cluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.

i If the mobile phone network is unavaila-ble, mbrace will not be able to make theemergency call. If you leave the vehicleimmediately after pressing the SOS button,you will not know whether mbrace placedthe emergency call. In this case, alwayssummon assistance by other means.

206 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Roadside Assistance button

X Press Roadside Assistance button: formore than two seconds.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center. The indicatorlamp in Roadside Assistance button:flashes while the call is active. The Con‐Con‐necting Callnecting Call message appears on themultifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐Call Con‐nectednectedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.If a cellular phone network is available andthere is sufficient GPS reception, the mbracesystem transmits data to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification number

i The COMAND display shows that anmbrace call is active. During the call, youcan change to the navigation menu bypressing the NAVI button on COMAND, forexample.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or arranges for your vehicleto be transported to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. You may be chargedfor services such as repair work and/or tow-

ing. Further details are available in yourmbrace manual.

i The mbrace system failed to initiate aRoadside Assistance call if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assis-tance call button: is flashing contin-uously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This may be because the correspondingmobile phone network is not available.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on COMAND.

MB Info call button

X Press MB Info call button: for more thantwo seconds.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center. The indicatorlamp inMB Info call button: flashes whilethe connection is being made. The Con‐Con‐necting Callnecting Call message appears in themultifunction display and the COMANDsystem is muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐Call Con‐nectednectedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

Features 207

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

If a cellular phone network is available andthere is sufficient GPS reception, the mbracesystem transmits data to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification number

i The COMAND display shows that anmbrace call is active. During the call, youcan change to the navigation menu bypressing the NAVI button on COMAND, forexample.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants. You canobtain information on how to operate yourvehicle's systems, on the location of the near-est authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, and onfurther products and services offered byMercedes-Benz USA.USA only: you can find further information onthe mbrace system under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

i The mbrace system failed to initiate anMB Info call if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call but-ton: is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This may be because the correspondingmobile phone network is not available.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on COMAND.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-gency call will take priority and override allother active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended. An emergencycall can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on themultifunction steer-ing wheelRor the corresponding COMAND button forending a telephone call

i If an mbrace call is initiated, audio outputis muted. The mobile phone is no longerconnected to COMAND. If you must useyour mobile phone, we recommend thatyou do this only when the vehicle is sta-tionary and in a safe location.

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinationsi Information on the components and oper-ating principles of COMAND can be foundin the separateCOMANDoperating instruc-tions.

This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack-age and cannot be purchased separately.

i You can only use the Destination Down-load function if the vehicle is equipped witha navigation system.

Destination Download gives you access to adata bank with over 15 million Points of Inter-est (POIs). These can be downloaded on thenavigation system in your vehicle. If you knowthe destination, the address can be down-loaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the loca-tion of Points of Interest (POIs)/importantdestinations in the vicinity.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.

208 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.

i If you select NoNo, the address can be storedin the address book.

i The Destination Download function isavailable if the corresponding mobilephone network is available and data trans-fer is possible.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack-age and cannot be purchased separately.

i You can also use the Route Assistancefunction if your vehicle is not equipped witha navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form ofnavigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.The customer service representative deter-mines a suitable driving route based on yourcurrent vehicle position and the desired des-tination and guides you live through the cur-rent sections of the route.

Search & Send"Search & Send" is a destination entryservice. You can find further information on"Search & Send" in the separate COMANDoperating instructions.

Vehicle remote closingThe remote closing feature can be used whenyou have forgotten to lock the vehicle and youare no longer nearby. The vehicle can then belocked by the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.The vehicle can be locked remotely up to fourdays after the ignition was last switched off.X Contact the following service hotlines:

RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your PIN.The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the Tele AidTele AidDoors Locked RemotelyDoors Locked Remotely message appearsin the multifunction display.USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can belocked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i The vehicle remote closing feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then attempts to locate the mbracesystem. The Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center contacts you and thelocal law enforcement agency if the vehicleis located. However, only the law enforce-ment agency is informed of the location ofthe vehicle.

i If the anti-theft alarm system is active forlonger than 30 seconds, mbrace automat-ically informs the Mercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.

Features 209

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Extendable rear spoilerThe rear spoiler improves the handling of thevehicle. It adapts the vehicle's aerodynamicsto the operating conditions, dependent on thespeed of the vehicle.

Example: Coupe

i If the vehicle is equipped with AMG adap-tive sport suspension system, the button isin the switch strip above the air condition-ing control panel.

Only use button: to extend and retract therear spoiler manually for cleaning. Button:is not used to operate the rear spoiler.If you drive at speeds above 75 mph(120 km/h), the rear spoiler extends auto-matically. Button: flashes until the rearspoiler has extended and then lights up in red.If you drive at speeds above 50 mph(80 km/h), the rear spoiler remainsextended. Button: remains lit in red.If you drive at speeds below 50 mph(80 km/h), the rear spoiler retracts automat-ically. Button: flashes until the rear spoilerhas retracted and then goes out.

Extending and retracting the rearspoiler manuallyYou can extend and retract the rear spoilermanually for cleaning.

G WARNINGBody parts could become trapped if you man-ually retract the rear spoiler. There is a risk ofinjury.

Make sure that nobody is within the range ofmovement of the rear spoiler. Release theswitch immediately if somebody becomestrapped. The rear spoiler then extends again.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Do not enter an automatic car wash withthe rear spoiler extended. Otherwise, therear spoiler may be damaged.Only extend the rear spoiler in order toclean it by hand. Retract it again when youhave finished cleaning it.

X Close the trunk lid.X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 119).

X To extend: press button:.The rear spoiler is extended.Button: flashes until the rear spoiler hasextended and then lights up in red.

X To retract: press and hold button: untilthe rear spoiler is completely retracted.Button: flashes until the rear spoiler hasretracted and then goes out.Rear Spoiler retracts manuallyRear Spoiler retracts manuallyappears in the display.

i If you release button: while retractingthe rear spoiler, it extends again automati-cally.

210 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Problems with the rear spoiler

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The rear spoiler stopsbefore reaching theend position whenretracting manually.

You have opened the trunk lid while manually retracting the rearspoiler.X Close the trunk lid.The rear spoiler extends or, if you press and hold button:,continues retracting.

The rear spoiler stopsbefore reaching theend position whenretracting/extendingmanually.

You have switched off the ignition.X Switch the ignition back on.X Press button to extend/retract the rear spoiler.The rear spoiler extends/retracts.

The rear spoiler cannotbe retracted again aftermanually extending it.

You have opened the trunk lid while manually extending the rearspoiler.X Close the trunk lid.

The rear spoiler doesnot extend or retractautomatically.

The rear spoiler's movement is blocked, e.g. by an object jammedbetween the body and the rear spoiler.X Remove the object.

Garage door opener

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

The HomeLink® garage door opener inte-grated in the rear-view mirror allows you tooperate up to three different door and gatesystems.Use the integrated garage door opener onlyon garage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsWhen programing a garage door opener, parkthe vehicle outside the garage.

i Certain garage door drives are incompat-ible with the integrated garage dooropener. If you have difficulty programingthe integrated garage door opener, contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the followingtelephone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100

Features 211

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

i Notes about the declaration of conformitycan be found here (Y page 22).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Programming

Programing buttonsPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 211).

Integrated garage door opener in the rear-viewmir-ror

Garage door remote controlA is not part ofthe integrated garage door opener.X Before programing for the first time, clearthe integrated garage door opener memory(Y page 214).

X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 119).

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.i Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soonas button;,= or? is programed for thefirst time. If the selected button has alreadybeen programed, indicator lamp: willonly light up yellow after ten seconds haveelapsed.

X Release button;,= or?.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Point garage door remote controlAtowards buttons; to? on the rear-view

mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to20 cm).i The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.If indicator lamp: lights up green orflashes, then programing was successful.

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.

X If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming procedure for the correspond-ing button on the rear-view mirror. Whendoing so, vary the distance between remotecontrolA and the rear-view mirror.

i If the indicator lamp flashes green aftersuccessful programing, the garage doorsystem is using a rolling code. After pro-graming, you must synchronize the garagedoor opener integrated in the rear-viewmir-ror with the receiver of the garage doorsystem.

Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 211).Your vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or exterior gate drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 119).

X Press the programing button of the door orgate drive (see the door or gate drive oper-ating instructions, e.g. under "Programingadditional remote controls").

212 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

i Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini-tiate the next step.

X Press previously programed button;,=or? of the integrated garage door openeruntil the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programing the remote controlCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated garage dooropener. The signal is not recognized duringprograming. Comparable with Canadian law,someU.S. garage door openers also feature a"break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programing thegarage door opener (regardless of whereyou live) when using the programing steps

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remotecontrolA for two seconds, then release itfor two seconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB ofremote controlA until indicator lamp:lights up green.If indicator lamp: turns red, repeat theprocess.

X Continue with the other programing steps(see above).

Problems when programingIf you are experiencing problems programingthe integrated garage door opener on therear-view mirror, take note of the followinginstructions:RCheck the transmitter frequency of garagedoor drive remote controlA. This can usu-ally be found on the back of the remotecontrol.The integrated garage door opener is com-patible with devices that have units whichoperate in the frequency range of 280 to433 MHz .RReplace the batteries in garage doorremote controlA. This increases the like-lihood that garage door remote controlAwill transmit a strong and precise signal tothe integrated garage door opener in therear-view mirror.RWhen programing, hold remote controlAat varying distances and angles from thebutton that you are programing. Try variousangles at a distance between 2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote control for the samegarage door drive is available, repeat thesame programing steps with this remotecontrol. Before performing these steps,make sure that new batteries have beeninstalled in garage door drive remotecontrolA.RNote that some remote controls only trans-mit for a limited amount of time (the indi-cator lamp on the remote control goes out).Press buttonB on remote controlA againbefore transmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal recep-tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorOnce programed, the integrated garage dooropenerA will assume the function of thegarage door system's remote control. Please

Features 213

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

also read the operating instructions for thegarage door system.X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogramed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-cator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp: flashes green.i The transmitter will transmit a signal aslong as the button is pressed. The trans-mission is halted after a maximum of tenseconds and indicator lamp: lights upyellow. Press button;,= or? again ifnecessary.

Clearing the memoryX Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton.

X Press buttons; and?.The indicator lamp lights up yellow.

X Press and hold buttons; and? until theindicator lamp turns green.

i Make sure that you clear the memory ofthe integrated garage door opener beforeselling the vehicle.

Charge maintenance socketThe battery may drain if the vehicle is left sta-tionary for long periods. In this case,Mercedes-Benz recommends attaching thetrickle charger to the charge maintenancesocket.The charge maintenance socket is designedsolely for connecting a trickle charger. Atrickle charger can be obtained from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, for exam-ple.

X Switch the ignition off.X Open the trunk lid.X Connect the cable provided in the trunk tothe trickle charger.

X Connect the trickle charger to chargemain-tenance socket:. Consult the manufac-turer's operating instructions on how to doso.

i A trickle charger connected to chargemaintenance socket: only maintains thecurrent charge level of the vehicle's elec-trical system battery. If the vehicle's elec-trical systembattery is discharged, it needsto be charged with a battery charger. Youwill find further information on charging thebattery at (Y page 238).

Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

214 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X Slide the seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in position.X Press studs: onto retainers;.X To remove: pull the floormat off retain-ers;.

X Remove the floormat.

Features 215

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

216

Useful information ............................ 218Engine compartment ........................ 218Maintenance ...................................... 222Care .................................................... 223

217

Maintenance

andcare

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 23).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

218 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Hood release lever in driver's footwellX Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch han-dle; up and lift the hood.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a heightof approximately 8 inches (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and closeit with a little more force.

Engine oil

General notesDepending on the driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) of oil over adistance of 600 miles (1000 km). The oil con-sumption may be higher than this when thevehicle is new or if you frequently drive at highengine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe in a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off forapproximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly, wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

Engine compartment 219

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Unscrew and remove oil filler cap: withthe integrated dipstick.

X Wipe the oil dipstick.X Screw on oil filler cap: again to the stop.X Unscrew oil filler cap: again and read thedipstick.If the level is between MIN mark= andMAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark=or below, add 1.1US qt (1.0 liter) engine oil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with aservice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.

Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that havenot been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters afterthe interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add toomuch oil. adding toomuchengine oil can result in damage to theengine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

X Unscrew and remove oil filler cap: withthe integrated dipstick.

X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below theMINmark onthe oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) ofengine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck andtighten clockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dip-stick (Y page 219).

You will find further information about engineoil in the "Technical data" section(Y page 283).

220 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Additional service products

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized, par-ticularly when the engine is warm. Whenopening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.

Only check the coolant level when the vehicleis on a level surface and the engine has cooleddown.X Set the Start/Stop button to key position2.

X Check the coolant temperature display inthe "AMG" menu (Y page 160).The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clockwise and allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of the markerbar in the filler neck when cold, there isenough coolant in coolant expansiontank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above the marker bar in the fillerneck when warm, there is enough coolantin coolant expansion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has beentested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

Youwill find further information about coolantin the "Technical data" section (Y page 285).

Windshield washer system and head-lamp cleaning system

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

The washer fluid reservoir is used for both thewindshield washer system and the headlampcleaning system.

Engine compartment 221

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-ommended minimum of 1 liter, a messageappears in the multifunction display prompt-ing you to add washer fluid (Y page 185).Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 286).

Maintenance

Service interval display

Service messagesInformation on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).The service interval message informs you ofthe next service due date.If a service due date has been exceeded, youalso hear a warning tone.The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:Next Service A in .. daysNext Service A in .. daysService A DueService A DueService A Exceeded by .. daysService A Exceeded by .. daysThe letter indicates which service is due. AAstands for a minor service and BB for a major

service. A number or another letter may bedisplayed after the letter. This figure indicatesany necessary additional maintenance workto be performed.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The service interval display does not take intoaccount any periods of time during which thebattery is disconnected.Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayedin the multifunction display before discon-necting the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtractthe battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

i The service interval display does not pro-vide any information regarding the engine'soil level. Observe the notes on the engineoil level (Y page 219).

Hiding a service messageX Press the%orabutton on the steer-ing wheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select theASSYST PLUSASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm bypressing thea button.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.

Points to remember

Resetting the service interval displayA qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will resetthe service interval display after the neces-

222 MaintenanceMaintenance

andcare

sary service work has been carried out. Youcan also obtain further information on main-tenance work, for example.

! If the service interval display has beenreset unintentionally, have the setting cor-rected at a Mercedes-Benz Center.Have service work carried out as describedin the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth-erwise lead to increased wear and damageto the major assemblies or the vehicle.

Special service requirementsThe specifiedmaintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditionsor increased load on the vehicle, mainte-nance work must be carried out more fre-quently, for example:Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi-ate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travelshort distancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long peri-ods

Under these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires mustbe checked more often. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialist work-shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Driving abroadAnextensiveMercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notesRegular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents rec-ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

Exterior care

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

Care 223

Maintenance

andcare

Z

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! When washing your vehicle in a tow-through car wash, use the SmartKeyinstead of the Start/Stop button.Start the engine using the SmartKey.. Movethe transmission to N with the E-SELECTlever. Use the SmartKey to switch theengine off again and then turn the Smart-Key to position 2. Make sure that you thenleave the SmartKey in position 2. You mayotherwise damage the vehicle, the trans-mission or the car wash.Check the transmission position in theinstrument cluster.

! Use the E‑SELECT lever to shift the trans-mission to N before switching the engineoff. If you open the driver's or front-passenger door, the transmission remainsin this position for up to 30 minutes if theSmartKey is in the ignition, even if theengine is switched off. If you do not shift thetransmission toN using the E‑SELECT leverbeforehand, it shifts automatically to park-ing position P and locks the wheels if thedriver's or front-passenger door is openedand the engine is switched off. This maydamage the vehicle, the transmission orthe car wash.

Observe the information on maneuvering(Y page 131).

! Before driving into an automatic carwash,make sure that it is suitable for the dimen-sions of the vehicle. In particular, makesure that:Rthere is enough ground clearancebetween the vehicle underbody and theguide rails of the automatic car wash.Rthe clearance width of the automatic carwash is sufficient, particularly the widthof the guide rails.Ryou enter the automatic car washstraight and in the center of the guiderails in order to avoid damaging the tiresor wheel rims.

Fold in the exterior mirrors before the vehi-cle is washed. The exterior mirrors couldotherwise be damaged.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the roof are com-pletely closedRthe climate control blower is switched offRthe windshield wiper switch is at position0

The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.

! In portal car washes, the windshield wip-ers may be moved up the windshield by thecleaning brushes when the ignition isswitched off.Set the Start/Stop button to key position 2to reset the windshield wipers to their orig-inal position.

! Preferably use automatic car washes withadjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning. Thiscorresponds with the specification for theCabriolet program. In car washes that usehigh water pressures, there is a risk that asmall amount of water may leak into thevehicle.

! Cabriolet: do not treat the vehicle withhot wax under any circumstances.

After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax and drying agents from the windshieldand thewiper blades. Thiswill prevent smears

224 CareMaintenance

andcare

and reduce wiping noises caused by residueon the windshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in each coun-try.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towardsthe air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out thesponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on thepaintwork.

Carefully remove all deposits of road salt assoon as possible when driving in winter.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.

Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

Cleaning the wheels

! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the paintworkScratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused by inade-quate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.X Remove impurities immediately, wherepossible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

Care 225

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.

! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.This is the case approximately every three tofive months, depending on the climate con-ditions and the care product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or thepaint has become dull, the paint cleaner rec-ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benzshould be used.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MBTouch-Up Stick, to correct smaller areas ofpaint damage quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish careIf your vehicle has a clear matte finish,observe the following instructions in order toavoid damage to the paintwork due to incor-rect care.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate-rials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-ishing products such as gloss preserver(wax). These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerable sur-face damage (shiny, spotted areas).If wax comes into contact with the paintedsurface by accident, remove it immediatelywith commercially available petroleumether. Do so carefully and do not apply toomuch pressure to the painted surface.Ensure that no resinous, greasy or oily sub-stances come into contact with the paint,as these can leave a residue. If such sub-stances do come into contact with thepainted surface accidentally, remove theseimmediately with commercially availablepetroleum ether. Do so carefully and do notapply too much pressure to the paintedsurface.Tar stains or marks on the painted surfacecan be removed with a commercially avail-able tar remover. Do so carefully and do notapply too much pressure to the paintedsurface.Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

226 CareMaintenance

andcare

Cleaning the Roadster soft topX Light soiling: you can clean the soft topwhile it is dry or rinse it with clear water.

X Normal to heavy soiling: clean the softtop with a brush and clear water. Cleanstains and other dirt with a brush and softtop cleaning agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Always brush from front to back, followingthe grain of the fabric.

! Never use any of the following to clean thesoft top:RgasolineRthinnerRtar or stain removerRother organic solvents

! Remove bird droppings immediately, asthey are corrosive and can therefore causethe soft-top fabric to leak. Do not wash thevehicle with a power washer or in a carwash that uses power washers. Do not usesharp-edged equipment to remove ice andsnow.

Frequent cleaning reduces the soft top'sresistance to dirt.To restore this resistance to dirt, clean thesoft top using soft top cleaning agents thathave been recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.Incorrect cleaning and care, as well as aging,can cause the soft-top seams to leak. Havethe soft-top seams sealed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop, e.g. at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

i Cover the soft top appropriately if youplan to leave the vehicle outside for a longperiod of time.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning the

windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Only fold thewindshieldwipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

X Clean the inside and outside of the win-dows with a damp cloth and a cleaningproduct that is recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of thewindows.Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.There is otherwise a risk of damaging thewindows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certain circumstan-ces prevent water from draining away. Thiscan lead to corrosion damage and damageto electronic components.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Only fold thewindshieldwipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

Care 227

Maintenance

andcare

Z

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

X Switch off the engine.X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.X Set the windshield wiper to the ° posi-tion on the combination switch.

X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedlyuntil the windshield wiper starts.

X When the wiper arms have reached a ver-tical position, press the Start/Stop button.

X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-shield until it engages.

X Set the wiper blade at right angles to thewiper arm.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

Cleaning the exterior lightingX Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlighting using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo or cleaning cloths.

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals in the exterior mirror housing using

a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent,e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or clean-ing cloths.

Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a dis-tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) betweenthe vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipment manufac-turer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens:.

228 CareMaintenance

andcare

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.

Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhaustpipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win-ter and after washing.X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome careproduct tested and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Interior care

Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-lowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household clean-ing agents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-ble damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth andTFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-fiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-ces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and selec-tor leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Care 229

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-ments

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk ofdamaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Do not usemicrofiber cloths to clean gen-uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICAcovers. If used often, these can damage thecover.

i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort ofthe covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat coversLeather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:Rdifferences in the textureRsigns of stretching and markingRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefullywith a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-ers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with amicrofiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and alwayswipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leavethe seat to dry afterwards. Cleaningresults depend on the type of dirt andhow long it has been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a dampcloth. Make sure that you wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

230 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-tion.

Care 231

Maintenance

andcare

Z

232

Useful information ............................ 234Where will I find...? ........................... 234Flat tire .............................................. 235Battery (vehicle) ................................ 238Jump-starting .................................... 242Towing and tow-starting .................. 244Fuses .................................................. 246

233

Breakdow

nassistance

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 23).

Where will I find...?

First-aid kitThe first-aid kit is located in the left-handstowage compartment in the trunk.X Open the trunk lid.

X Turn fastener; in the direction of thearrow.

X Open stowage compartment:.X Open the Velcro fastener and remove thefirst aid kit.

i Check the expiration date on the first-aidkit at least once a year. Replace the con-tents if necessary, and replace missingcontents.

Vehicle tool kit

Wheel-change tool kit and jack3

The wheel-change tool kit and the jack arelocated in the left-hand stowage space in thetrunk.

Left-hand stowage space in trunk floor: Lug wrench; Towing eyeX Pull the loop on the floor covering and foldthe floor covering forward.

X Take out the jack and lug wrench: under-neath it.

TIREFIT kit, wheel chock, alignment boltand glovesThe TIREFIT kit, wheel chock, alignment boltand gloves are located in the left-hand stow-age compartment in the trunk.

Left-hand stowage compartment in the trunk

3 Not included in the scope of delivery in all countries.

234 Where will I find...?Breakdow

nassistance

X Remove the jack from the left-hand stow-age space in the trunk to allow the stowagecompartment to be opened.

X Turn fastener; in the direction of thearrow.

X Open stowage compartment:.X Remove the TIREFIT kit, wheel chock, align-ment bolt and gloves.

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle is equipped with a TIREFIT kit.X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Apply the electric parking brake manually(Y page 133).

X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Shift the transmission to P with the buttonin the center console.

X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed. Any-one who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-fic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

TIREFIT kit

Using the TIREFIT kitTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem-peratures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures oron a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

Flat tire 235

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Do not remove any foreign objects whichhave penetrated the tire, e.g. screws ornails.

X Take the TIREFIT kit out of the trunk(Y page 234).

X Open the TIREFIT kit and remove "max.80 km/h" stickerD.

X Affix stickerD within the driver's field ofvision.

i If TIREFIT leaks out, allow it to dry. It canthen be removed like a layer of film.If you get TIREFIT on your clothing, have itcleaned as soon as possiblewith perchloro-ethylene.

Comply with the manufacturer's safetyinstructions on the tire inflation compressorlabel and on the tire sealant bottle.

i You will also find operating instructions= in the lid of the TIREFIT kit.

X Pull the cable and filler hoseE out of thehousing.

X Unscrew flanged capA.

X Unscrew the cap from tire sealant bot-tle:. Make sure that the aluminum film isnot damaged when doing so.

X Screw tire sealant bottle: clockwisetightly onto flange sealF.This pierces the aluminum film.

X Remove the cap from the valve on the faultytire.

X Make sure that pressure release screwCis closed.

X Remove the dust protection cap from fillerhoseE.

X Screw the end of filler hoseE onto tirevalveG.

X Make sure that on/off switch; on the tireinflation compressor is set to 0.

X Insert connector? into the 12 V socket(Y page 203).

X Select key position 2 with the Start/Stopbutton (Y page 119).i The battery discharges during tire infla-tion compressor usage. For this reason,

236 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

you should start the engine unless you areinflating the tire in an enclosed space.

X Press on/off switch; on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated.i First, TIREFIT is pumped into the tire. Thepressure can briefly rise to approximately500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for amaximum of ten minutes. The tire shouldthen have attained a pressure of at least180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).Switch the tire inflation compressor offbriefly to read the correct value from pres-sure gaugeB.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-sor for longer than ten minutes at a timewithout a break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be oper-ated again once it has cooled down.

Tire pressure of at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi) is not reachedIf, after five minutes, a pressure of 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi) has not been achieved:

X Switch off the tire inflation compressor,remove it and drive the vehicle approx-imately 30 ft (10 m) forward or back.This distributes the TIREFIT more evenly.

X Leave tire sealant bottle: attached to theflange.

X Pump up the tire again.

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) is reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

If the tire pressure is at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi):X Press on/off switch; on the tire inflationcompressor to 0.The tire inflation compressor is switchedoff.

X Remove connector? from the 12 Vsocket.

X Remove filler hoseE from tire valveGand re-install the dust protection cap.Screw the valve cap onto the valve again.Leave tire sealant bottle: attached toflangeF.

Flat tire 237

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Stow the TIREFIT kit in a safe and accessi-ble place in the vehicle.

X Pull away immediately.The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tiresealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper partof the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to theinstrument cluster in the driver's field ofvision.

! After use, excess TIREFIT may run out ofthe filler hose. This could cause stains.

X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure withthe tire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

i On tires that are equippedwith a tire pres-sure sensor (tire pressuremonitor), the useof sealant can lead to malfunction mes-sages and incorrect displays. Therefore,use pressure gaugeB in the TIREFIT kit tocheck and correct the tire pressure.

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/20 psi) (for the values,see the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard on the driver's side B-pillar or tire pres-sure table on the fuel filler flap).To increase the tire pressure: switch onthe tire inflation compressor.To reduce the tire pressure: open releasescrewC.

! The manufacturer does not guaranteethat all tire damage can be repaired usingthe TIREFIT kit, particularly in the case of

cuts and punctureswith a diameter ofmorethan fourmillimeters or on the sidewall. Themanufacturer is not responsible for dam-age caused by inappropriate use of theTIREFIT kit.

X Drive to the nearest workshop and have thetire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced assoon as possible at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Have the TIREFIT kit replaced every fouryears at a qualified specialist workshop,e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installing. You should thereforehave all work involving the battery carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting sys-tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®(Electronic Stability Program). The operatingsafety of your vehicle may be restricted. Youcould lose control of the vehicle, for example:RbrakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuverand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.

238 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gasmixture formswhencharging the battery as well as when jump-starting.Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, forexample:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across thecarpet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.

RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the Main-tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it isnecessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove theSmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switchedoff. Check that all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,

Battery (vehicle) 239

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

electronic components, such as thealternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminalclamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys-tem may be damaged.Rthe transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. The vehi-cle is secured against rolling away. Youcan then no longer move the vehicle.

The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-tact with skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact a physi-cian if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries provide

increased impact protection to prevent vehi-cle occupants from suffering acid burnsshould the battery be damaged in the event ofan accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-mum possible service life, it must always besufficiently charged.The vehicle battery, like other batteries, candischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the battery discon-nected at a qualified specialist workshop. Youcan also charge the battery with a chargerrecommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact aqualified specialist workshop for further infor-mation.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainlyfor short trips or if you leave it standing idlefor a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop if you wish to leave yourvehicle parked for a long period of time.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use verylittle energy, thus conserving batterypower.

i If the battery power supply has been inter-rupted, e.g. if the battery was fully dis-charged, youwill need to reset the "exteriormirrors automatic folding function", byfolding the mirrors out once (Y page 91).

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.

240 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 242).Never charge the battery if it is still installed inthe vehicle, unless you use a battery chargerwhich has been tested and approved byMercedes-Benz. A battery charger unit spe-cially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehiclesand tested and approved by Mercedes-Benzis available as an accessory. It permits thecharging of the battery in its installed posi-tion. Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter for further information and availabil-ity. Charge the battery in accordance with theseparate instructions for the accessory bat-tery charger.Read the battery charger's operating instruc-tions before charging the battery.X Open the hood (Y page 218).X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donor bat-tery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 242).

Battery (vehicle) 241

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Jump-starting

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seekmedical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.

242 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connectedfor a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminalclamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.

X Press the electric parking brake handle.X Shift the transmission to P with the button in the center console.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).X Open the hood (Y page 218).

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.X Slide coverA of positive terminal: in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal: on your vehicle to positive terminal; of donor batteryBusing the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal= of donor batteryB to earth point? of your vehicle using thejumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor batteryB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.

Jump-starting 243

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X First, remove the jumper cables from earth point? and negative terminal=, then frompositive clamp: and positive terminal;. Each time beginning with your vehicle's battery.

X Slide coverA of the positive terminal in the opposite direction to the arrow.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe rear axle locks when:Rthe engine is not runningRthe engine stalls while the vehicle is beingtowedRthere is a malfunction in the power supplyor the vehicle's electrical system

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a breakdown, you shouldalways have the vehicle transported.

G WARNINGIf the brake system or power steering is mal-functioning and your vehicle is then towedaway, significantly more effort may berequired to steer and brake than is normallyrequired. There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGIf the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-started is greater than the permissible grossweight of your vehicle:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

! Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button when towing the vehicle.Start the engine and keep it running. Turnthe SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition.Set the transmission to N using the E-SELECT lever. Make sure that you thenleave the SmartKey in position 2.Check the transmission position in theinstrument cluster.

! Make sure that the electric parking brakeis released. If the electric parking brake isfaulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usean authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthis purpose.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbe damaged.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recoverypurposes as this could damage the vehicle.If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

244 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

! Tow-starting the vehicle is not permitted.The transmission may otherwise be dam-aged.

If the vehicle can no longer be driven becauseof an accident or breakdown, you have thefollowing options:Rtransporting the vehicleAs a rule, you should have the vehicle trans-ported.Rtowing the vehicle with the rear axle raisedOnly tow the vehicle with the rear axleraised in exceptional cases.Rtowing the vehicle with a tow rope or towbarOnly tow the vehicle in exceptional cases.The engine must be running if you tow thevehicle with a tow rope or tow bar. Observethe following notes.

Also observe the following notes:RIf the engine does not start, try jump-start-ing it (Y page 242). Tow-starting the vehicleis not permitted.RIf it is not possible to jump-start the vehicle,have it transported to the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RIf the vehicle has transmission damage,have it transported to a qualified specialistworkshop. Observe the display messagesin the instrument cluster.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eyeX Take the towing eye and the wheel wrench4out of the wheel-change tool kit(Y page 234).

The bracket for the removable towing eye is inthe bumper at the front. It is located under thecover.

X Pull out cover: forwards.X Take cover: off the opening.

Removing the towing eyeX Take the lug wrench4 from the wheel-change tool kit (Y page 234).

X Insert the lug wrench handle into the tow-ing eye and turn it counter-clockwise.

X Unscrew the towing eye.X Attach cover: to the bumper and pressuntil it engages.

X Return the towing eye and the lug wrenchto the wheel-change tool kit.

X Return the towing eye and the lug wrenchto the trunk.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraisedWhen towing your vehicle with the rear axleraised, it is important that you observe thesafety instructions (Y page 244).Only tow the vehicle with the rear axle raisedin exceptional cases.

! The engine must be switched off (Smart-Key in ignition lock in position 0 or position1) if the vehicle is being towed with the rearaxle raised or if the parking brake is beingtested on a dynamometer. Intervention byESP® could otherwise damage the brakesystem.

4 Not included in the scope of delivery.

Towing and tow-starting 245

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 98).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition and that the engine is run-ning throughout the towing procedure.

X Move the transmission to N with the E-SELECT lever. Check the transmission posi-tion in the instrument cluster.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundIt is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 244).X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 98).i When towing with the hazard warningflashers switched on, use the combinationswitch as usual to signal in which directionyou are changing. In this case, only theindicator lamps for the direction of travelflash. When you reset the combinationswitch, the hazard warning flashers startflashing again.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock(Y page 119).

X Start the engine and leave the SmartKey inthe ignition.

X Move the transmission to N with the E-SELECT lever.

X Check the transmission position in theinstrument cluster display (Y page 123).

X Leave the engine running throughout theentire towing procedure

Transporting the vehicleThe towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transportingpurposes.

! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as

axle or steering components. Otherwise,the vehicle could be damaged.

X Start the engine.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition and that the engine is run-ning during the entire loading operation.

X Move the transmission to N with the E-SELECT lever. Check the transmission posi-tion in the instrument cluster.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the electric parking brake.

X Shift the transmission to P with the buttonin the center console.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock and remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.

X Secure the vehicle.

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Otherwise, components or sys-tems could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize by

246 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

the color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Before changing a fuseX Park the vehicle and apply the electric park-ing brake.

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:Rfuse box in the footwell on the front-passenger sideRfuse box in the rearThe "Relay and fuse information sheet" islocated with the wheel-change toolkit in thetrunk.

Fuse box in the footwell

X To open: remove the carpet over the foot-rest.

X Loosen screws: on the floor panel usinga suitable tool.

X Remove the floor panel.X To close: install the floor panel again.X Screw in and tighten screws:.X Put in the carpet and press to secure.

! The floor panelmust be installed properly,otherwise moisture or dirt could impair thefunction of the fuses.

Fuse box in the rear

Coupe

X To open: open the trunk.X Fold cover: in the center of the rear walldown in the direction of the arrow.

X To close: fold cover: up in the oppositedirection to the arrow and press to secure.

! The cover must be installed properly, oth-erwise moisture or dirt could impair thefunction of the fuses.

Roadster

X To open: from the vehicle interior, lift upcover: between the roll bars in the direc-tion of the arrow.

X To close: shut cover: in the oppositedirection to the arrow and press to secure.

Fuses 247

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

! The cover must be installed properly, oth-erwise moisture or dirt could impair thefunction of the fuses.

248 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

Useful information ............................ 250Important safety notes .................... 250Operation ........................................... 250Winter operation ............................... 252Tire pressure ..................................... 253Loading the vehicle .......................... 260All about wheels and tires ............... 263Changing a wheel ............................. 270Wheel and tire combinations ........... 275

249

Wheelsandtires

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 23).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WarningA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.do not drive with a flat tire. Immediatelyreplace the flat tire with your spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or that are not

being used correctly can impair the operatingsafety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on dimensions and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can be found(Y page 275).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflapRunder "Tire pressure"

i Further information on wheels and tirescan be obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop.

Operation

Information on drivingRIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check thetire pressures and correct them if neces-sary.RWhile driving, pay attention to vibrations,noises and unusual handling characteris-tics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may indi-cate that the wheels or tires are damaged.If you suspect that a tire is defective,reduce your speed immediately. Stop thevehicle as soon as possible to check thewheels and tires for damage. Hidden tiredamage could also be causing the unusualhandling characteristics. If you find nosigns of damage, have the wheels and tireschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curb orother obstacles. If it is necessary to driveover curbs, speed humps or similar eleva-

250 OperationWheelsandtires

tions, try to do so slowly and at an obtuseangle. Otherwise, the tires, particularly thesidewalls, may be damaged.

Notes on high performance tires

G WARNINGDue to the special tire tread in combinationwith the optimized rubber compound, there isan increased risk of hydroplaning and skid-ding on a damp or wet road surface. tire grip isalso noticeably reduced at low outside tem-peratures and low tire operating tempera-tures. There is a risk of an accident.Turn on ESP® and adapt your driving styleaccordingly. When the outside temperaturefalls below 10 †, use M+S tires.

i Different driving styles may lead to hightire wear and the tires may reach the min-imum tire tread depth after only a shorttime.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Regularly check the wheels and tires of yourvehicle for damage at least once a month, aswell as after driving off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss oftire pressure. Pay particular attention to dam-age such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels

Regularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole widthof the tire (Y page 251). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notmount anything onto the valve other than thestandard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.Do not use any other valve caps or systems,e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tiresparticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tirepressure as necessary (Y page 253).The service life of tires depends on the fol-lowing factors amongst other things:Rdriving styleRtire pressureRdistance covered

Tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Operation 251

Wheelsandtires

Z

Bar indicator: for tread wear is integratedinto the tire tread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They are visible once the tread depth isapproximatelyá in (1.6 mm). If this is thecase, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the sametype and make.ROnly mount tires of the correct size ontothe wheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds forthe first 60miles (100 km). They only reachtheir full performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the lat-est, regardless of wear.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 270).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), summertires experience a considerable loss in elas-ticity and therefore traction and brakingpower. Change the tires on your vehicle toM+S tires. Using summer tires at very coldtemperatures could cause cracks to form,thereby damaging the tires permanently.Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibilityfor this type of damage.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), use win-ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tireare identified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-ditions. Only these tires will allow drivingsafety systems such as ABS and ESP® tofunction optimally in winter. This is becausethese tires were specifically developed fordriving in snow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handling charac-teristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted the M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 253).X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 259).

252 Winter operationWheelsandtires

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

! On some tire sizes there is not enoughspace for snow chains. To avoid damage tothe vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel andtire combinations" section under "Tires andwheels".

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains thathave been specially approved for your vehicleby Mercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality.RYou may not attach snow chains to allwheel-tire combination, see the informa-tion under "Wheels and tires" in the "Tech-nical data" section.ROnly use snow chains when driving onroads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon as possi-ble when you come to a road that is notsnow-covered.RLocal regulations may restrict the use ofsnow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-ulations if you wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

i You can deactivate ESP®(Y page 55)when pulling away with snow chains instal-led. You can thereby allow the wheels tospin in a controlled manner, achieving anincreased driving force (cutting action).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

i The specifications on the sample Tire andLoading Information placard and tire pres-sure tables are examples. Tire pressurespecifications are vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data shown here. The tirepressure specifications that are valid foryour vehicle can be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard and tire pres-sure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressure 253

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressuresThe Tire and Loading Information placard ison the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 260).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires. The recommended tire pressuresare valid for the maximum permissible loadand up to the maximum permissible vehiclespeed.

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of thefuel filler flap.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for variousoperating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in thetable for different numbers of occupants andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire sizeand can be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 264).If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be reset tothe higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in thetire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.

254 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.Formore information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe electronic tire pressure monitor, the tirepressure can be checked in the on-boardcomputer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-ent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.

The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when check-ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correctthe tire pressure if it is too low for the currentoperating conditions. If you check the tirepressure when the tires are warm, the result-ing value will be higher than if the tires werecold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tirepressure to the value specified for cold tires.The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flap

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRadversely affect handling

Tire pressure 255

Wheelsandtires

Z

Rwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the rec-ommended tire pressure for your vehiclewhen adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 253).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 253).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard on the B-pillar (Y page 260)Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflap (Y page 129)Rin the "Tire pressure" section (Y page 253).

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pres-sure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is tobe checked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it withthe recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillaron the driver's side of your vehicle.

X If necessary, increase the tire pressure tothe recommended value (Y page 253).

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air bypressing down the metal pin in the valveusing the tip of a pen, for example. Thencheck the tire pressure again using the tirepressure checker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressuremonitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor thetire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres-sure monitor warns you if the pressure dropsin one or more of the tires. The tire pressure

256 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

monitor only functions if the correct sensorsare installed on all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a fewminutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the ServiceServicemenu of the mul-tifunction display.

Example

For information on the message display, referto the "Checking the tire pressure electroni-cally" section (Y page 258).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once every twoweeks when cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Ifyour vehicle has tires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or, if available, the tirepressure label, you should determine theproper tire pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure.

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even ifunderinflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-sure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-tem detects a malfunction, the warning lampwill flash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-minated, the systemmay not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of incom-patible replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMSfrom functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate Tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 253). Note that the correct tire pres-sure for the current operating situation mustfirst be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.If there is a substantial loss of pressure, thewarning threshold for the warning message isaligned to the reference values taught-in.Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjust-ing the pressure of the cold tires(Y page 259). The current pressures aresaved as new reference values. As a result, a

Tire pressure 257

Wheelsandtires

Z

warning message will appear if the tire pres-sure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 253).The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn-ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat-ing a pressure loss or malfunction. Whetherthe warning lamp flashes or lights up indi-cates whether a tire pressure is too low or thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, thetire pressure on one or more tires is signif-icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor isnot malfunctioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

i In addition to the warning lamp, a mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.Further information can be found on(Y page 182).

If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning,it may take more than ten minutes for the tirepressure warning lamp to inform you of themalfunction by flashing for approximately oneminute and then remaining lit. When the mal-function has been rectified, the tire pressurewarning lamp goes out after a few minutes ofdriving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge.The tire pressures shown by the on-boardcomputer refer to those measured at sealevel. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val-ues indicated by a pressure gauge are higher

than those shown by the on-board computer.In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressuremonitor canbe affected by interference from radio trans-mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones,two-way radios) that may be being operatedin or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 119).

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the Tire pressure will beTire pressure will bedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressuremonitor automatically detects new wheels ornew sensors. As long as a clear allocation ofthe tire pressure value to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire PressureTire PressureMonitor ActiveMonitor Active display message is showninstead of the tire pressure display. The tirepressures are already being monitored.

i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted,the system may continue to show the tirepressure of the wheel that has beenremoved for a few minutes. If this occurs,note that the value displayed for the posi-tion where the spare wheel is mounted isnot the same as the current tire pressure ofthe emergency spare wheel.

258 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressuremonitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning messageis shown in the multifunction display and theyellow tire pressure monitor warning lampcomes on.RIf the Correct Tire PressureCorrect Tire Pressure messageappears in the multifunction display, thetire pressure in at least one tire is too lowand must be corrected at the next oppor-tunity.RIf the Check Tire PressureCheck Tire Pressure messageappears in the multifunction display, thetire pressure in one or more tires has drop-ped significantly and the tires must bechecked.RIf the Tire Pressure Warning TireTire Pressure Warning TireMalfunctionMalfunctionmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display, the tire pressure in oneormore tires has dropped suddenly and thetires must be checked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes inthe display messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 182).

i If the wheel positions on the vehicle arerotated, the tire pressures may be dis-played for the wrong positions for a shorttime. This is rectified after a few minutes ofdriving, and the tire pressures are displayedfor the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressuremonitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as the refer-ence values formonitoring. Inmost cases, thetire pressure monitor will automaticallydetect the new reference values after youhave changed the tire pressure. However, youcan also define reference values manually asdescribed here. The tire pressure monitorthen monitors the new tire pressure values.

X Set the tire pressure to the value recom-mended for the corresponding driving sit-uation on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the driver's sideB-pillar (Y page 253).Additional tire pressure values for differentloads can also be found on the tire pressuretable on the inside of the fuel filler flap(Y page 253).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the cur-rent tire pressure for the individual tires orthe TireTire pressurepressure willwill bebe displayeddisplayedafter driving a few minutesafter driving a few minutes mes-sage.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as NewUse Current Pressures as NewReference ValuesReference Values message appears inthe multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor RestartedTire Press. Monitor Restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure 259

Wheelsandtires

Z

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows themaximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximum permis-sible vehicle load. It also contains detailsof the tire sizes and corresponding pres-sures for tires mounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-pants, the fuel and the cargo. You canalso find information about themaximumgross axle weight rating on the front andrear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or the maxi-mum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combined weightof occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,cargo, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The maximum permis-sible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in theillustration. You can find the validmaximumpermissible gross vehicle weight rating foryour vehicle on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard.

260 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The number of seats isvehicle-specific and can differ from thedetails shown. The number of seats in yourvehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-ing Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-bined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXX kilo-grams or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amountof available cargo and luggage load capa-city is 650 lbs (1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage load capa-city calculated in step 4.

Loading the vehicle 261

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea load limit of 1 500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you areusing the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard (Y page 261).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Step 1

Example 1 Example 2

Combined maximum weight ofoccupants and cargo (data fromthe Tire and Loading Informationplacard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2

Number of people in the vehicle(driver and occupants)

1 2

Weight of the occupants Occupant 1: 175 lbs(80 kg)

Occupant 1: 175 lbs(80 kg)Occupant 2: 195 lbs(88 kg)

Gross weight of all occupants 175 lbs (80 kg) 370 lbs (168 kg)

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2

Permissible load (maximumgross vehicle weight rating fromthe Tire and Loading Informationplacard minus the gross weightof all occupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg)Ò175 lbs (80 kg) =1325 lbs (600 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg)Ò370 lbs (168 kg) =1130 lbs (512 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargocarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate on

the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 260).Gross vehicle weight: the gross weight ofthe vehicle, all passengers, cargo and trailerload/noseweight (if applicable) must notexceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.

262 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Gross axleweight rating: themaximumper-missible weight that can be carried by oneaxle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (gross vehi-cle weight and maximum gross axle weightrating), have your loaded vehicle (includingdriver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load ifapplicable) weighed on a suitable vehicleweighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Their pur-pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia-ble information on tire performance data. tiremanufacturers have to grade tires using threeperformance factors: tread wear:, tire trac-tion; and heat resistance=. All tires soldin North America are provided with the cor-responding quality class mark on the sidewallof the tire, even though these regulations donot apply to Canada.Quality grades can be found, where applica-ble, on the tire sidewall between the treadshoulder and maximum tire width.

Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as atire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, how-ever, and may depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest –are AA, A, B and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

All about wheels and tires 263

Wheelsandtires

Z

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfa-ces.You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth ofã in (4 mm) on all four wintertires. Observe the legally required minimumtire tread depth (Y page 251).Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.The braking distance is still much further thanon surfaces that are not icy or covered withsnow. Take appropriate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+Stires) (Y page 252).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C. They represent the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissi-pate heat when tested under controlled con-ditions on a specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperature can causethe material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level of performance whichall passenger car tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Tire labeling

OverviewThe following markings are on the tire in addi-tion to the tire name (sales designation) andthe manufacturer's name:

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 268)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 267)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 267)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 256)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 268)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa-

city and speed rating (Y page 264)D Load index (Y page 266)E Tire name

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.

264 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed rating

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

General: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S. manu-facturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tirepressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio: aspect ratio; is the size ratiobetween the tire height and tire width and isshown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcu-lated by dividing the tire width by the tireheight.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description depending on the manu-facturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diam-eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of therim flange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexAis a numerical code that specifies the maxi-mum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 260).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires canbear. For further information on themaximumtire load in kilograms and lbs, see(Y page 267).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 266).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully andadapt your driving style to the traffic condi-tions.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

All about wheels and tires 265

Wheelsandtires

Z

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph(300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149mph (240 km/h)may have "ZR" inthe size description depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).The service specification is made up ofload-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifica-tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order tofind out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In this exam-ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. Theletter "Y" represents the speed index andthe maximum speed of the tire is limited to186 mph (300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR" and the service specifi-cation must be given in brackets. Example:275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). The speed index "(Y)"indicates that the maximum speed of thetire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask thetire manufacturer about the maximumspeed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S5 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S5 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S5 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S5 Up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with theM+Smarking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to the M+S marking, winter tiresalso have thei snowflake symbol onthe tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfillthe requirements of the Rubber Manufac-turers Association (RMA) and the RubberAssociation of Canada (RAC) regardingsnow traction, and were specially devel-oped for driving on snow.

The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-tory may be higher than the maximum speedthat the electronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating for your vehicle as specified inthe "Tires" section (Y page 275), e.g. if youbuy new tires.Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

Load index

5 Or M+Si for winter tires.

266 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

In addition to the load-bearing index, loadindex: may be imprinted after the lettersthat identify speed ratingB(Y page 264) onthe sidewall of the tire.RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforcedtireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range thatdepends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximum per-missible weight for which the tire is approved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 260).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations stipulate that every tiremanufacturer or retreader must imprint a TINin or on the sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables tire manufacturers to inform pur-chasers of recalls and other safety-relevantmatters. It makes it possible for the pur-chaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifi-cation code;, tire size=, tire type code?and manufacturing dateA.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: marks that the tire complies withthe requirements of the U.S. Department ofTransportation.Manufacturer identification code: manu-facturer identification code; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols.Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be usedby the manufacturer as a code to describespecific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that ismarkedwith "3208"was manufactured in week 32 in 2008.

All about wheels and tires 267

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire characteristics

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

This information describes the tire cord andthe number of layers in sidewall: and undertire tread;.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. There are14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe U S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants the vehicle isdesigned to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftireswith regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. The qualitygrading assessment is made by the manufac-turer following specifications from the U.S.

government. The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressuresThe recommended tire pressure for your vehi-cle under normal driving conditions. You willfind the recommendation on the Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side of your vehicle. The recom-mended tire pressure provides the best bal-ance between handling characteristics, ridecomfort and wear. Supplemental informationpertaining to special driving situations can befound on the tire inflation pressure label onthe inside of the fuel filler flap.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installedon the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum permissible axleweight. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identifica-tion. It specifies the speed range forwhich thetire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-ble. The gross vehicleweightmust not exceedthe gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) asspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

268 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permitted grossweight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories, occu-pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-weight if applicable). The gross vehicle weightrating is specified on the vehicle identificationplate on the B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of the curbweight of the vehicle, the weight of the acces-sories, the total load limit and the weight ofthe optional equipment installed at the fac-tory.

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa is theequivalent of 1 psi. Another unit for tire pres-sure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindexmay also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa-city more precisely.

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standard equip-ment including themaximum capacity of fuel,oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-tioning system and optional equipment ifthese are installed in the vehicle, but does notinclude passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum load rating in kilograms orpounds is the maximum weight for which atire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing themaximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold. For this,the vehicle must have been stationary for atleast three hours or not have traveled morethan 1.6 km (1 mile) in this time.

Tire pressure of cold tiresThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been drivenmore than1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardpart and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).These optional extras, such as high-perform-ance brakes, level control, a roof rack or ahigh-performance battery, are not included in

All about wheels and tires 269

Wheelsandtires

Z

the curb weight and the weight of the acces-sories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains themaximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsThis is indicated by narrow bars (treadwearbars) that are distributed over the tire tread. Ifthe tire tread is level with the bars, the wearlimit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitRated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilo-grams (150 lb) times the vehicle's designatedseating capacity.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 235) contains information and noteson how to deal with a flat tire.

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components arelocated in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage the elec-tronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes when changing a wheel(Y page 271).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan change the wheels according to the inter-vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty bookin your vehicle documents. If no warrantybook is available, the tires should be rotatedevery 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Donot change the direction of wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated. Check the tire pressure and reac-tivate the tire pressure monitor if necessary.

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk

270 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

of hydroplaning. You will only gain these ben-efits if the correct direction of rotation ismaintained.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStorewheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Remove Start/Stop button from ignitionlock (Y page 119).

X Take the following objects from the left-hand stowage compartment and the left-hand stowage space in the trunk:Rlug wrenchRfolding wheel chockRjackRalignment bolt

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling awayIf your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock,it can be found in the vehicle tool kit(Y page 234).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsafety measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.

X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully intothe openings in base plate=.

Changing a wheel 271

Wheelsandtires

Z

Securing the vehicle on level groundX On level ground: place chocks or othersuitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradientsX On downhill gradients: place chocks orother suitable items in front of the wheelsof the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

The following must be observed when raisingthe vehicle:Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-cle raised.Rthe jack is designed only to raise and holdthe vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suited for per-forming maintenance work under the vehi-cle.Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill anddownhill slopes.Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the electric park-ing brake and positioning wheel chocks.Never release the electric parking brakewhile the vehicle is raised.Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, load-bearing underlay must be used.On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlaymust be used, e.g. rubber mats.Rdo not use wooden blocks or similarobjects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.Rmake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).Rnever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.Rnever start the engine when the vehicle israised.Rnever open or close a door or the trunk lidwhen the vehicle is raised.Rmake sure that no persons are present inthe vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

272 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the wheel boltscompletely.

The mounting for the jack is centeredbetween the front and rear wheel housings(arrow).

! The jack is designed exclusively for jack-ing up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

X Position jack= at jacking point;.

ExampleX Make sure that the base of the jack is posi-tioned directly under jacking point;.

X Turn crank? clockwise until jack= sitscompletely on jacking point; and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn crank? until the tire is raised a max-imum of 1.2 inches (3 cm) off the ground.

Removing a wheel

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-pletely.

X Screw alignment boltA into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

! AMG ceramic high performance com-pound brake system:

Changing a wheel 273

Wheelsandtires

Z

When detaching or attaching thewheel, thewheel rim may hit against the ceramicbrake disc and damage it.For this reason, you should proceed care-fully. Request the assistance of a secondperson or use a second alignment bolt.

X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec-tion (Y page 270).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have beenapproved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.

: Wheel boltX Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Place the wheel onto the alignment boltand push it on.

274 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-ger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clock-wise until the vehicle is once again standingfirmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:toA). The specified tightening torque is133 lb-ft(180 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to the out-of-use posi-tion and stow it in the trunk again with therest of the wheel-changing tools.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-ommends that you only use tires andwheels which have been approved by

Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-cle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1=Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessoriestested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehi-cle noise emissions or fuel consumption,may otherwise be adversely affected. Inaddition, when driving with a load, tiredimension variations could cause the tiresto come into contact with the bodyworkand axle components. This could result indamage to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than thosetested and approved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop.

i The Tire and Load Information placardwith the recommended tire pressures is onthe B-pillar on the driver's side. Furtherinformation about driving at high speeds ordriving with vehicle loads that are lighterthan the maximum vehicle load can befound in the tire pressure table on theinside of the fuel filler flap. Check tire pres-sures regularly, and only when the tires arecold. Comply with the maintenance recom-mendations of the tiremanufacturer. Theseare located in the vehicle document wallet.

Further information on recommended tirepressures as well as tire pressures for spe-cific driving situations, see (Y page 253).

Wheel and tire combinations 275

Wheelsandtires

Z

i Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle(left/right)Rwith the same type of tires on all wheelsat a given time (summer tires, wintertires)

i The following pages contain informationon approved wheel rims and tire sizes forequipping your vehicle with winter tires.Winter tires are not available at the factoryas standard equipment or optional extras.If you wish to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, you will also require,in certain circumstances, wheel rims of anappropriate size, as the sizes of approvedwinter tires can deviate from those ofstandard tires. This is dependent on themodel and the equipment installed at thefactory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

276 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Tires

Summer tires

Front axle

Summer tires 265/35 ZR19 (98Y) XL

Light alloy rim 9.5J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.36 in (60 mm)or9.5J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

Rear axle

Summer tires6 295/30 ZR20 (101Y) XL

Light alloy rim 11J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.68 in (68 mm)

Winter tires, variant 1

Front axle

Winter tires 265/35 R19 98W XL M+S

Light alloy rim 9.5J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.36 in (60 mm)or9.5J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

Rear axle

Winter tires 295/30 R20 101W XL M+S

Light alloy rim 11J x 20 H2Wheel offset: 2.68 in (68 mm)

Winter tires, variant 2

Front and rear axles

Winter tires 255/35 R19 96V XL M+S

Light alloy rim 9.5J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)

6 Snow chains not permitted.

Wheel and tire combinations 277

Wheelsandtires

Z

278

Useful information ............................ 280Information regarding technicaldata .................................................... 280Warranty ............................................ 280Identification plates ......................... 280Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 281Vehicle data, Coupe .......................... 286Vehicle data, Roadster ..................... 287

279

Technicaldata

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Please read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops (Y page 23).

Information regarding technical data

You can find technical data on the Internet at:http://www.mercedes-benz.com

i The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthe data for all vehicle variants and trimlevels.

Warranty

The Service and Warranty Information book-let contains detailed information about thewarranties covering your vehicle.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective parts origi-nally installed in the vehicle in accordancewith the terms of the following warranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, RhodeIsland and Vermont Emission Control Sys-tem WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (LemonLaws)

Replacement parts and accessories are cov-ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-sories warranties. You can obtain informationabout this from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and War-ranty Information booklet, have an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for areplacement. It will be mailed to you.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN) andpaint code number

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Paint code

280 Identification platesTechnicaldata

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the identification plateis example data. This data is different forevery vehicle and can deviate from the datashown here. You can find the data applica-ble to your vehicle on the vehicle identifi-cation plate.

VIN

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear-most position.

X Fold floor covering: upwards.You will see VIN;.

Additionally, the vehicle identification num-ber (VIN) can be found in the following loca-tions:Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 280)Ron the lower edge of the windshield(Y page 281)

Engine number

: Emission control information plate,including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards

; VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)= Engine number (stamped into the crank-

case)

Service products and filling capaci-ties

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerant

Service products and filling capacities 281

Technicaldata

Z

Components and service products must bematched. You should therefore only use prod-ucts that have been tested and approved byMercedes-Benz.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-tion on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 331.0)RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 331.0)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.MB 331.0). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Total capacity 22.5 gal (85 l)

Of which reserve Approx. 3.7 gal (14 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded gasolinewith aminimum octane rating of 91.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila-ble and you have to refuel with unleadedgasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol-lowing precautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg-ular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest

282 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

with premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead toengine failure.

Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/orunleaded gasolinewith additives can be used.The concentration of additives in the fuel,however, must not exceed 10%, e.g.:REthanolRTAMERETBERIPARTBAFor MTBE, the concentration should notexceed 15%.The concentration of methanol in gasoline,including other additives, must not exceed3%.Usingmixtures ofmethanol and ethanol is notpermitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% ethanoland 90% unleaded gasoline, may be used.All of these blendsmust fulfill the fuel require-ments, e.g.:Rknock resistanceRboiling pointRvapor pressureYouwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff for assis-tance.

i For further information, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or onthe Internet at http://www.mbusa.com(USA only).

Information on refueling (Y page 129).

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Donot mix fuel additives with fuel. This doesnot include additives for the removal andprevention of residue buildup. gasolinemust only be mixed with additives recom-mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply withthe instructions for use on the productlabel. More information about recom-mended additives can be obtained fromany authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usefuel brands that have the additives.The quality of the fuel available in some coun-tries may not be sufficient. Residue couldbuild up as a result. In such cases, and inconsultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gasoline may be mixed withthe cleaning additive recommended byMercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254512).Youmust observe the notes andmixing ratiosspecified on the container.

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary to ful-fill the prescribed service intervals. Do notchange the engine oil or oil filter in order toachieve longer replacement intervals thanthose prescribed. You could otherwisecause engine damage or damage to theexhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the service inter-val display regarding the oil change. Other-wise, you may damage the engine and theexhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 281).The engine oils are matched to the perform-ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and serviceintervals. You should therefore only use

Service products and filling capacities 283

Technicaldata

Z

engine oils and oil filters that are approved forvehicles with maintenance systems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

MB sheet number 229.57

i MB approval is indicated on the oil con-tainers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Engine with oil filter 10.0 US qt (9.5 l)

Additives

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE classification(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outsidetemperatures. The table shows you whichSAE classifications are to be used. The low-

temperature characteristics of engine oilscan deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a resultof aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is thereforestrongly recommended that you carry out reg-ular oil changes using an approved engine oilwith the appropriate SAE classification.

Refrigerant of the air-conditioningsystem

Important safety notes

Type of refrigerantThe climate control system of your vehicle isfilled with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

Refrigerant R‑134a! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAGoil approved by Mercedes-Benz may beused. The approved PAG oil may not bemixed with any other PAG oil that is notapproved for R-134a refrigerant. Other-wise, the climate control system may bedamaged.

Service work, such as topping-up refrigerantor replacing components, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. Allapplicable regulations must be adhered to,SAE standard J639 included.Always have work on the climate control sys-tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

7 Restriction: only use SAE 0W-40/SAE 5W-40 engine oils.

284 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable SAE standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerantWarning symbols: indicate:Rpossible dangersRhaving service work carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop

Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

All models Capacity

Refrigerant 28.2 oz(800 g)

PAG oil

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.

You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

When handling brake fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 281).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialist work-shop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced ata qualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g.on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the cooling system is not suffi-ciently protected from corrosion and over-heating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Complywith the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 281).

Service products and filling capacities 285

Technicaldata

Z

The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs thefollowing tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35‡ (-37†), the boiling point of the cool-ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-tion in the engine cooling system should:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protectiondown to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equalamounts of water and antifreeze/corrosioninhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends anantifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate inaccordance with MB Specifications forService Products 310.1.The coolant is checked with every mainte-nance interval at a qualified specialist work-shop.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-led with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-tion.

Windshield/headlamp cleaning sys-tem

Important safety notes

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB WinterFit.

Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temper-ature.RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB Win-terFit to 2 parts water.RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB Win-terFit to 1 part water.RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MBWinterFit to 1 part water.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

All models 7.4 US qt (7.0 l)

Vehicle data, Coupe

Dimensions and weightsThe data stated here specifically refers to avehicle with standard equipment. Consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thedata for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

286 Vehicle data, CoupeTechnicaldata

Coupe

: Height whenopened (rearspoiler retracted)

63.4 in (1610 mm)

: Height whenopened (rearspoiler extended)

66.0 in (1677 mm)

: Height whenopened (fixed rearspoiler)

67.5 in (1714 mm)

: Range of move-ment exceedingvehicle width

14.3 in (362 mm)

; Height whenopened (exteriormirrors folded in)

73.7 in (1873 mm)

; Height whenopened (exteriormirrors folded out)

76.6 in (1946 mm)

Vehicle length 182.7 in (4640 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exterior

mirrors

81.7 in (2075 mm)

Vehicle height 49.7 in (1262 mm)

Wheelbase 105.5 in (2680 mm)

Front track 66.2 in (1682 mm)

Rear track 65.0 in (1651 mm)

Ground clearance 3.9 in (99 mm)

Turning radius 47.6 ft (12.1 m)

Maximum trunkload

137 lb (62 kg)

Vehicle data, Roadster

Dimensions and weightsThe data stated here specifically refers to avehicle with standard equipment. Consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thedata for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Roadster

Vehicle data, Roadster 287

Technicaldata

Z

: Height whenopened (rearspoiler retracted)

67.4 in (1713 mm)

: Height whenopened (rearspoiler extended)

68.2 in (1732 mm)

: Height whenopened (fixed rearspoiler)

68.69 in (1770 mm)

SLS AMG Roadster

Vehicle length 182.7 in (4640 mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

81.7 in (2075 mm)

Vehicle height 49.6 in (1261 mm)

Wheelbase 105.5 in (2680 mm)

Front track 66.2 in (1682 mm)

Rear track 65.0 in (1651 mm)

Ground clearance 3.9 in (99 mm)

Turning radius 39.7 ft (12.1 m)

Maximum trunkload

137 lb (62 kg)

288 Vehicle data, RoadsterTechnicaldata